Chevrolet Automobile 1999 Corvette User Manual

yellowblue  
The 1999 Chevrolet Corvette Owner’s Manual  
Seats and Restraint Systems  
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the air bag system.  
Features and Controls  
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.  
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems  
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.  
Your Driving and the Road  
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.  
Problems on the Road  
This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.  
Service and Appearance Care  
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.  
Maintenance Schedule  
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.  
Customer Assistance Information  
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.  
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-10.  
Index  
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find  
something you want to read.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Corvette: The American  
Dream Machine  
In the early ’50s, it was only a designer’s dream. Today  
the Corvette stands alone as America’s dream car -- a  
testament to its unmistakable charisma and the  
excitement it inspires. Unique styling, powerful  
performance and an undeniable panache have made  
Corvette one of the most celebrated sports cars in  
the world.  
In 1953, Corvette produced 300 new lightweight  
fiberglass roadsters. A handful went to project  
engineers, General Motors managers, and a select group  
of movie stars and celebrities. With a two-speed  
Powerglide automatic transmission, Blue Flame  
six-cylinder engine, and gleaming Polo White exterior,  
the Corvette began its drive into the heart of America.  
Designers freshened up the ’Vette in 1956 by adding a  
removable hardtop and the famous Corvette “coves.”  
The sculptured body enhanced its sporty look, and a  
standard 210-horsepower Chevy V8 engine solidified  
Corvette’s reputation as a production race car.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
In 1963, Corvette hit the road with an eye-catching new  
look -- the Sting Ray coupe. An instant success, the  
now-classic Sting Ray featured concealed headlamps  
and a unique split rear window. The split window would  
only be offered in 1963, making this model among the  
most prized Corvettes ever built.  
Restyled inside and out for 1968, this ’Vette sported a  
lean and hungry shape, creating a sense of motion even  
when standing still. And for the first time, Corvette  
offered removable roof panels.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
For its 25th anniversary, the 1978 Corvette paced the 62nd Annual Indianapolis 500 and received a new fastback  
roofline with a wide expanse of glass that wrapped around the sides.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
The structure of the fifth-generation redesign is the  
stiffest ever developed in 44 years of Corvette  
production, resulting in unparalleled ride quality and  
outstanding handling. Also unique to the new Corvette  
is a rear-mounted transmission.  
Available as a Coupe for 1997, the new Corvette offered  
such standard features as extended-mobility tires, a  
Bose audio system, and a new, latch-operated roof  
designed for easy removal.  
In 1984, the fourth generation of America’s favorite  
sports car anticipated the future with a sleek look and  
advanced technology that provided superior handling  
and performance. Windshield angle was the sheerest of  
any domestic vehicle, cornering ability the tightest of  
any production car. In short, the 1984 redesign enhanced  
the Corvette’s reputation as a leader in the world sports  
car market.  
With many design cues inspired by the classic models  
of the 1960s, the new fifth-generation Corvette is an  
impressive combination of sleek styling and world-class  
sports car performance. For 1998, in addition to the  
Coupe, a convertible was reintroduced. The  
fifth-generation Corvette rollout was completed in 1999  
with the introduction of the hardtop model.  
After 44 years of production, Corvette only got better.  
The fifth-generation Corvette arrived in 1997, featuring  
a completely restyled body and a new, all-aluminum,  
5.7 Liter, 345-horsepower LS1 V8 engine.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Corvette Assembly Plant  
The Corvette Assembly Plant in Bowling Green,  
Kentucky is one of the most sophisticated and  
computerized automobile assembly facilities in  
the world. To build your 1999 Corvette, over  
1,025 employes teamed up with the 58 high-tech  
robots that assist in a variety of processes, from welding  
to painting.  
The Bowling Green facility is Corvette’s third home  
since 1953. Since beginning production in June  
of 1981, it has become one of Kentucky’s most  
popular tourist attractions.  
Corvette Assembly Plant tours are available. For  
dates and times, call (502) 745-8228. Reservations  
are required for groups of 10 or more.  
The new National Corvette Museum, located near the  
assembly plant, opened its doors in September of 1994.  
It is also attracting tourists to the area. For more  
information, call 1-800-53-VETTE or (502) 781-7973.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
How to Use this Manual  
CAUTION:  
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning  
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you  
do this, it will help you learn about the features and  
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find  
that pictures and words work together to explain  
things quickly.  
These mean there is something that could hurt  
you or other people.  
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then  
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the  
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or  
others could be hurt.  
Index  
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in  
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in  
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.  
You will also find a circle  
with a slash through it in  
this book. This safety  
symbol means “Don’t,”  
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t  
let this happen.”  
Safety Warnings and Symbols  
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.  
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you  
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore  
the warning.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
In the notice area, we tell you about something that  
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage  
would not be covered by your warranty, and it could  
be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help  
avoid the damage.  
Vehicle Damage Warnings  
Also, in this book you will find these notices:  
NOTICE:  
When you read other manuals, you might see  
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors  
or in different words.  
These mean there is something that could  
damage your vehicle.  
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use  
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Vehicle Symbols  
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.  
For example,  
these symbols  
are used on an  
original battery:  
These symbols  
are important  
for you and  
your passengers  
whenever your  
vehicle is  
These symbols  
have to do with  
your lamps:  
These symbols  
are on some of  
your controls:  
These symbols  
are used on  
Here are some  
other symbols  
you may see:  
warning and  
indicator lights:  
MASTER  
LIGHTING  
SWITCH  
WINDSHIELD  
WIPER  
CAUTION  
POSSIBLE  
INJURY  
driven:  
ENGINE  
COOLANT  
TEMP  
FUSE  
DOOR LOCK  
UNLOCK  
TURN  
SIGNALS  
WINDSHIELD  
WASHER  
PROTECT  
EYES BY  
BATTERY  
CHARGING  
SYSTEM  
LIGHTER  
HORN  
SHIELDING  
PARKING  
LAMPS  
CAUSTIC  
BATTERY  
ACID COULD  
CAUSE  
WINDSHIELD  
DEFROSTER  
FASTEN  
SEAT  
BELTS  
BRAKE  
HAZARD  
WARNING  
FLASHER  
BURNS  
COOLANT  
SPEAKER  
FUEL  
REAR  
WINDOW  
DEFOGGER  
AVOID  
SPARKS OR  
FLAMES  
POWER  
WINDOW  
DAYTIME  
RUNNING  
LAMPS  
ENGINE OIL  
PRESSURE  
SPARK OR  
FLAME  
COULD  
EXPLODE  
BATTERY  
VENTILATING  
FAN  
ANTI-LOCK  
BRAKES  
AIR BAG  
FOG LAMPS  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Model Reference  
This manual covers these models:  
Convertible  
Hardtop  
Coupe  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
NOTES  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems  
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also  
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.  
Seats and Seat Controls  
1-39  
Air Bag System  
Children  
Child Restraints  
Larger Children  
Safety Belt Extender  
Checking Your Restraint Systems  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone  
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About  
Safety Belts -- and the Answers  
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
Driver Position  
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Passenger Position  
1-12  
1-  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Pull up on the lever in front of the seat to unlock it.  
Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the  
lever and try to move the seat with your body to make  
sure the seat is locked into place.  
Seats and Seat Controls  
This part tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them,  
and also about reclining seatbacks and seatback latches.  
Manual Seats  
CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is  
moving. The sudden movement could startle and  
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you  
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when  
the vehicle is not moving.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Different parts of the power seat control move different  
parts of the seat. To move the seat forward or rearward,  
move the control to the front or to the back. Move the  
control up to raise the seat and down to lower it. By  
tilting the back of the control, it will raise or lower the  
back of the seat. Tilting the front of the control will raise  
or lower the front of the seat.  
Power Seat (Option)  
Your preferred seat position can be stored and recalled  
if you have the memory option. See “Memory” in  
the Index.  
The switch for the power seats is located on the side of  
each seat, near the base.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Sport Seat (Option)  
Reclining Seatbacks  
In addition to the power seat control, there are three  
other switches that help you change the shape of the  
seat. There are two lumbar supports for the middle (A)  
and lower (B) back. There’s also a side bolster switch  
(C) that adjusts the sides of the seat around you to give  
you more lateral support.  
The lever for the reclining seatback is located on the  
side of each seat, near the base.  
To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to lift your  
weight off the seatback. Pull completely up on the lever  
until it stops, and lean back to position the seatback to  
where you want it. Release the lever to lock the seatback  
into place.  
For lumbar support, move each switch (A and B)  
forward to inflate or rearward to deflate.  
Move the side bolster switch (C) up for more side  
support and down for less support.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CAUTION:  
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is  
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle  
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when  
you’re reclined like this.  
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it  
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in  
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,  
receiving neck or other injuries.  
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the  
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt  
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.  
This could cause serious internal injuries.  
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle  
is moving.  
For proper protection when the vehicle is in  
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well  
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Seatback Latches  
CAUTION:  
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward  
in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury  
to the person sitting there. Always press rearward  
on the seatback to be sure it is locked.  
Both seatbacks fold forward to give you access to the  
rear area. To fold a seatback forward, lift this latch,  
which is located on top of the backside of the seat, and  
pull the seatback forward. The seatback will lock down  
in this position. To unlock, lift up on the latch and push  
the seatback rearward. When you return the seatback to  
its original position, make sure the seatback is locked.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone  
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts  
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do  
with safety belts.  
CAUTION:  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,  
people riding in these areas are more likely to be  
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to  
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not  
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure  
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a  
safety belt properly.  
And it explains the air bag system.  
CAUTION:  
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear  
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and  
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries  
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the  
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously  
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might  
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your  
safety belt, and check that your passenger’s belt  
is fastened properly too.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Your vehicle has a light that  
comes on as a reminder to  
buckle up. (See “Safety  
Belt Reminder Light” in  
the Index.)  
Why Safety Belts Work  
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as  
it goes.  
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to  
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.  
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a  
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.  
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so  
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.  
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,  
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes  
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly  
hurt or killed.  
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,  
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does  
matter ... a lot!  
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat  
on wheels.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Put someone on it.  
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider  
doesn’t stop.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
The person keeps going until stopped by something.  
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...  
or the instrument panel ...  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Here Are Questions Many People Ask  
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers  
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an  
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?  
A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety  
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,  
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of  
being conscious during and after an accident, so  
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if  
you are belted.  
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to  
wear safety belts?  
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in  
most of them in the future. But they are  
or the safety belts!  
supplemental systems only; so they work with  
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag  
system ever offered for sale has required the use of  
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air  
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most  
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,  
but especially in side and other collisions.  
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.  
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,  
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why  
safety belts make such good sense.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from  
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
home, why should I wear safety belts?  
Adults  
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an  
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and  
your passenger can be hurt. Being a good driver  
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your  
control, such as bad drivers.  
This part is only for people of adult size.  
Be aware that there are special things to know about  
safety belts and children. And there are different rules  
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding  
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called  
“Children.” Follow those rules for  
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of  
home. And the greatest number of serious  
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than  
40 mph (65 km/h).  
everyone’s protection.  
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your  
vehicle has.  
Safety belts are for everyone.  
We’ll start with the driver position.  
Driver Position  
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear  
it properly.  
1. Close and lock the door.  
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)  
so you can sit up straight.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the  
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way  
and start again. See “Lap Belt Cinch Feature” in  
the Index.  
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.  
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt  
Extender” at the end of this section.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.  
Don’t let it get twisted.  
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt  
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt  
across you more slowly.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies  
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely  
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt  
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause  
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go  
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the  
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.  
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or  
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.  
Lap Belt Cinch Feature  
If you do not want the lap belt to move freely, pull the  
lap belt out all the way to set the lock. To permit the lap  
belt to move freely again, unbuckle the belt, let it retract  
all the way, and buckle up again.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Q: What’s wrong with this?  
CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is  
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward  
too much, which could increase injury. The  
shoulder belt should fit against your body.  
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly  
as much protection this way.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Q: What’s wrong with this?  
CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt is  
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,  
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The  
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic  
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.  
Always buckle your belt into the buckle  
nearest you.  
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Q: What’s wrong with this?  
CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if you wear the  
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your  
body would move too far forward, which would  
increase the chance of head and neck injury.  
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the  
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.  
You could also severely injure internal organs  
like your liver or spleen.  
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should  
be worn over the shoulder at all times.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Q: What’s wrong with this?  
CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In  
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the  
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,  
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask  
your dealer to fix it.  
A: The belt is twisted across the body.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant  
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be  
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.  
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.  
The belt should go back out of the way.  
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the  
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the  
belt and your vehicle.  
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and  
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below  
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more  
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For  
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making  
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.  
CAUTION:  
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if  
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you  
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a  
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things  
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air  
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety  
belts. All air bags -- even Next Generation air  
bags -- are designed to work with safety belts,  
but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to  
work only in moderate to severe crashes where  
the front of your vehicle hits something. They  
aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear,  
side or low-speed frontal crashes. And, for  
unrestrained occupants, Next Generation air  
bags may provide less protection in frontal  
crashes than more forceful air bags have  
Passenger Position  
The passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the  
driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position” earlier in  
this section.  
Air Bag System  
This part explains the air bag system.  
Your vehicle has “Next Generation” frontal  
air bags -- one air bag for the driver and another  
air bag for the passenger.  
Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help  
reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating  
air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very  
quickly if they are to do their job and comply with  
federal regulations.  
provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle  
should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or  
not there’s an air bag for that person.  
Here are the most important things to know about the air  
bag system:  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
CAUTION:  
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air  
bag system is designed for them. Young children  
and infants need the protection that a child  
restraint system can provide. Always secure  
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,  
see the part of this manual called “Children” and  
see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the  
passenger’s safety belt.  
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink  
of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as  
you would be if you were leaning forward, it could  
seriously injure you. This is true even with Next  
Generation frontal air bags. Safety belts help keep  
you in position before and during a crash. Always  
wear your safety belt, even with Next Generation air  
bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible  
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.  
There is an air bag readiness  
light on the instrument  
panel, which shows the air  
bag symbol.  
CAUTION:  
Children who are up against, or very close to, any air  
bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed.  
This is true even though your vehicle has Next  
Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus  
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults,  
but not for young children and infants.  
The system checks the air bag electrical system for  
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical  
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index  
for more information.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
How the Air Bag System Works  
The passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the  
passenger’s side.  
Where are the air bags?  
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the  
steering wheel.  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side  
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not  
help the occupant.  
CAUTION:  
It is possible that in a crash only one of the two air bags  
in your vehicle will deploy. This is rare, but can happen  
in a crash just severe enough to make an air bag inflate.  
If something is between an occupant and an air  
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it  
might force the object into that person. The path  
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t  
put anything between an occupant and an air  
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the  
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air  
bag covering.  
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air  
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage  
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.  
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and  
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or  
near-frontal impacts.  
What makes an air bag inflate?  
When should an air bag inflate?  
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing  
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing  
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which  
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related  
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the  
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of  
the passenger.  
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe  
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate  
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed  
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a  
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is  
about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level  
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that  
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your  
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such  
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
How does an air bag restrain?  
CAUTION:  
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,  
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or  
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection  
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of  
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,  
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags  
would not help you in many types of collisions,  
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,  
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward  
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as  
anything more than a supplement to safety belts,  
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or  
near-frontal collisions.  
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.  
This dust could cause breathing problems for  
people with a history of asthma or other  
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the  
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.  
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out  
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get  
fresh air by opening a window or door.  
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,  
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.  
What will you see after an air bag inflates?  
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the  
passenger air bag.  
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly  
that some people may not even realize the air bag  
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the  
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the  
instrument panel for the passenger’s bag -- will be hot  
for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into  
contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.  
There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents  
in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent  
the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the  
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.  
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they  
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag  
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system  
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.  
A new system will include air bag modules and  
possibly other parts. The service manual for your  
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,  
which records information about the air bag system.  
The module records information about the readiness  
of the system, when the sensors are activated and  
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. Some  
modules also record speed, engine rpm, brake and  
throttle data.  
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle  
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.  
There are parts of the air bag system in several places  
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to  
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your  
dealer and the Corvette Service Manual have  
information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag  
system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and  
Owner Publications” in the Index.  
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag  
system. Improper service can mean that your air bag  
system won’t work properly. See your dealer  
for service.  
CAUTION:  
NOTICE:  
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is  
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air  
bag can still inflate during improper service. You  
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when  
it inflates. Avoid yellow wires, wires wrapped  
with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are  
probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to  
follow proper service procedures, and make sure  
the person performing work for you is qualified  
to do so.  
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the  
passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work  
properly. You may have to replace the air bag  
module in the steering wheel or both the air bag  
module and the instrument panel for the  
passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air  
bag coverings.  
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Children  
CAUTION:  
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes  
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither  
the distance to be traveled nor the age and size of the  
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety  
restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United  
States and in every Canadian province says children up  
to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.  
A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a  
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it  
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the  
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply  
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could  
cause serious or fatal injuries. Smaller children  
and babies should always be restrained in a child  
restraint. However, infants, who should be  
restrained in a rear-facing child restraint, cannot  
ride safely in this vehicle. The instructions for the  
restraint will say whether it is the right type and  
size for your child. If a forward-facing child  
restraint is suitable for your child, be sure the  
child is always properly restrained while riding in  
this vehicle.  
Smaller Children and Babies  
CAUTION:  
Children who are up against, or very close to, any  
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured  
or killed. This is true even though your vehicle  
has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags  
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection  
for adults, but not for young children and  
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system  
nor its air bag system is designed for them.  
Young children and infants need the protection  
that a child restraint system can provide. Always  
secure children properly in your vehicle.  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Infants need complete support, including support for the  
head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s  
neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared  
with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a  
rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash  
forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the  
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be  
secured in an appropriate infant restraint, but you  
shouldn’t secure that type of restraint in this vehicle  
because of the air bag risk.  
CAUTION:  
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a  
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a  
crash. During a crash a baby will become so  
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash  
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby  
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on  
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible  
to hold.  
Child Restraints  
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,  
they should have protection provided by  
appropriate restraints.  
Q: What are the different types of add-on  
child restraints?  
A: Add-on child restraints are available in four basic  
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into  
consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but  
also whether or not the restraint will be compatible  
with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use  
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system  
designed to restrain or position a child on a  
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,  
make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the  
center of the vehicle.  
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant  
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant  
restraints are designed for infants of up to about  
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type  
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,  
neck and body can have the support they need in a  
frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two  
parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle and  
the seat part is removable.  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions a  
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These  
forward-facing restraints are designed to help  
protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to  
18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in  
height, or up to around four years of age. One type,  
a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either  
as a rear-facing infant seat or a forward-facing  
child seat.  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child  
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it  
will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standards.  
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may  
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a  
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in  
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within  
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.  
The instructions that come with the child restraint will  
show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and  
the child restraint instructions are important, so if either  
one of these is not available, obtain a replacement copy  
from the manufacturer.  
The child restraint must be secured properly in the  
passenger seat.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move  
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in  
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child  
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.  
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who  
are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs. (18 to  
27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight  
years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve  
the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster  
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,  
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder belts.  
Booster seats can also help a child to see out  
the window.  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Vehicles First Sold in the United States:  
Top Strap  
Was your vehicle first sold in the United States? If so,  
don’t use a child restraint with a top strap in your  
vehicle because there’s no place to anchor a top strap.  
You shouldn’t use this type of child restraint without  
anchoring the top strap.  
Vehicles First Sold in Canada:  
If your vehicle has a fixed roof and was first sold in  
Canada, you can ask your dealer to install a top strap  
anchor for you. This work will be done for you free of  
charge. If you want to install the anchor yourself, your  
dealer can tell you how to do it. Anchor the top strap to  
the bracket.  
If your vehicle is a convertible or has a removable roof,  
don’t use a child restraint with a top strap because the  
anchor can’t be installed properly. You shouldn’t use this  
type of child restraint without anchoring the top strap.  
Canadian law requires that forward facing child  
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap  
be anchored.  
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should  
be anchored.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger  
Seat Position  
CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air  
bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next  
Generation frontal air bags. This is because the  
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be  
very close to the inflating air bag. Do not use a  
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.  
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for  
your child, always move the passenger seat as far  
back as it will go.  
Your vehicle has a passenger air bag. Never put a  
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle. Here’s why:  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part  
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure  
to follow the instructions that came with the child  
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and  
as the instructions say.  
1. Because your vehicle has a passenger air bag, always  
move the seat as far back as it will go before  
securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See  
“Seats” in the Index.)  
2. Put the restraint on the seat.  
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or  
neck, put it behind the child restraint.  
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the  
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the  
retractor to set the lock.  
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.  
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push  
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s  
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt  
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult  
or larger child passenger.  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Children who have outgrown child restraints should  
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.  
Larger Children  
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in  
a crash.  
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other  
people who are.  
1-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The  
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a  
crash, the two children can be crushed together  
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by  
only one person at a time.  
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,  
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is  
very close to the child’s face or neck?  
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but  
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s  
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body  
would have the restraint that belts provide.  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a  
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind  
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in  
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The  
belt’s force would then be applied right on the  
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or  
fatal injuries.  
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug  
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies  
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.  
1-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Safety Belt Extender  
Checking Your Restraint Systems  
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you  
should use it.  
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light  
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and  
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other  
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see  
anything that might keep a safety belt system from  
doing its job, have it repaired.  
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your  
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go  
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the  
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will  
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that  
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it  
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it  
to the regular safety belt.  
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a  
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is  
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.  
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and  
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system  
does not need regular maintenance.)  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you ever see a label on the driver’s or passenger’s  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
safety belt that says to replace the belt, be sure to do so.  
Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a  
collision. You would see this label on the belt near the  
latch plate.  
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?  
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.  
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn  
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.  
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision  
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt  
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs  
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at  
the time of the collision.  
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag  
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in  
this section.  
1-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Section 2 Features and Controls  
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,  
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is  
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.  
Door Locks  
Memory (Option)  
2-38  
2-39  
Parking Over Things That Burn  
Engine Exhaust  
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked  
(Automatic Transmission)  
Limited-Slip Rear Axle  
Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD) (Option)  
Windows  
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
Exterior Lamps  
Interior Lamps  
Mirrors  
Storage Compartments  
Roof Panel (Option)  
Convertible Top (Option)  
The Instrument Panel -- Your  
Information System  
Warning Lights, Gages and Messages  
Driver Information Center (DIC)  
Remote Function Actuation System  
Remote Hatch/Trunk Lid Release  
Universal Theft-Deterrent (Option)  
PASS-Key  
New Vehicle “Break-In”  
Ignition Positions  
2-39  
Starting Your Engine  
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)  
Automatic Transmission Operation  
Manual Transmission Operation  
Parking Brake  
Shifting Into PARK (P)  
(Automatic Transmission Only)  
Shifting Out of PARK (P)  
(Automatic Transmission)  
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission)  
2-37  
2-37  
2-  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Keys  
CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition  
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or  
others could be badly injured or even killed.  
They could operate power windows or other  
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t  
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
One key is used for the  
ignition, the doors and all  
other locks.  
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle,  
call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Center at  
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872).  
(In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.)  
NOTICE:  
Your vehicle has a number of features that can  
help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of  
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock  
your key inside. You may even have to damage  
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an  
extra key.  
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer gives the  
first owner a key and a bar coded tag. Both the key and  
the tag are attached to a key ring.  
The heavy paper tag has a code on it that tells your  
dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make an extra  
key. Keep the bar-coded tag in a safe place. If you lose  
your key, you’ll be able to have a new one made easily  
using this tag. If your key doesn’t have a tag and you  
need a new ignition key, go to your Chevrolet dealer for  
the correct key code.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
If your theft-deterrent system (if equipped) is armed,  
unlock the doors only with the key or the key fob  
transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm. See “Universal  
Theft-Deterrent” in the Index.  
Door Locks  
CAUTION:  
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.  
Passengers -- especially children -- can easily  
open the doors and fall out. When a door is  
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.  
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked  
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.  
This may not be so obvious: You increase the  
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a  
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts  
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far  
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.  
To lock the door from the inside, move the lock control  
on the door forward. To unlock it, move the lock control  
on the door backward.  
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.  
From the outside, use your door key or the key  
fob transmitter.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Power Door Locks  
Inadvertent Lockout Protection  
If you press the power door lock switch when a door is  
open and a key is in the ignition, a chime will sound.  
If the power door lock switch is pressed again within  
five seconds, the doors will lock.  
Leaving Your Vehicle  
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your  
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and  
close the door.  
Your vehicle has a Remote Function Actuation system  
that can also lock your vehicle as you walk away from  
it. See “Remote Function Actuation System” in  
the Index.  
Press the power door unlock/lock switch on either door  
to unlock or lock both doors at once.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Use button “1” to store the settings for the first driver, button  
“2” for a second driver or press buttons 1 and 2 at the same  
time for a third driver. To store your memory settings:  
Memory (Option)  
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat position,  
outside rearview mirror positions, comfort control  
temperature, fan speed, mode settings and telescopic  
steering wheel (if equipped).  
2. Press and hold a MEMORY button. The light above  
the MEMORY button will glow steady for one  
second and then flash once when the settings are  
complete. Then the light will go off.  
3. Set the radio presets, tone, volume, playback mode  
(AM/FM, tape or CD), tape direction and compact  
disc position.  
Your memory settings are now programmed. Any  
changes that are made to the audio system while driving  
are automatically stored.  
MEMORY can store and recall the settings for the  
driver’s seat position, the outside rearview mirror  
positions, comfort control temperature, fan speed and  
mode settings, telescopic steering wheel (if equipped),  
radio presets, tone, volume, playback mode  
(AM/FM, tape or CD), last displayed station,  
compact disc position and tape direction.  
When first entering your vehicle, after pressing the  
UNLOCK button on your key fob transmitter or a  
MEMORY button, a recall of your settings will occur  
when the ignition key is inserted. As the memory  
settings are recalled, the light above the button will flash  
until the correct settings are achieved, then glow for five  
seconds when complete.  
The MEMORY buttons are located on the driver’s side  
door, above the power mirror controls. The MEMORY  
buttons can store and recall settings for up to three drivers.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any memory  
seat, mirror or steering column position button.  
Your vehicle comes  
standard with two  
transmitters, and up to  
three can be matched to  
your vehicle.  
Drivers 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the order in which your  
key fob transmitters were programmed. (See “Fob  
Training” in the Index.)  
Memory recall will not work if the vehicle is moving,  
the key is removed from the ignition, the driver’s door is  
open, a power seat, mirror or memory switch is being  
used. Memory recall will be temporarily interrupted  
during engine crank.  
Remote Function Actuation System  
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” later in  
this section.  
Your vehicle has a passive/active Remote Function  
Actuation (RFA) system that allows you to lock and  
unlock your doors, unlock your hatch/trunk lid, turn  
the panic alarm on and off and disarm or arm your  
theft-deterrent system. When using one of the key fob  
transmitters supplied with your vehicle, the passive  
range distance is as much as 30 feet (9 m) away from the  
vehicle on the driver’s side and 20 feet (6 m) away on  
the passenger’s side. The active range distance is as  
much as 100 feet (30 m) away.  
Your RFA system operates on a radio frequency subject  
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules  
and with Industry Canada.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation of  
the device.  
Try to resynchronize the transmitter. See  
“Resynchronizing Your Transmitter” in this section.  
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a  
qualified technician for service.  
Operation  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
You don’t have to do anything for the RFA to work  
when the passive feature is on.  
If you ever notice a decrease in the key fob transmitter  
range, try doing one of the following:  
Check to determine if battery replacement is  
necessary. See the instructions that follow.  
Check the distance. You may be too far from your  
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy  
or snowy weather.  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be  
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or  
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.  
Check to make sure that an electronic device such  
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not  
causing interference.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you move out of range with the slider switch set to  
ON, the key fob transmitter will:  
Lock both doors after five seconds.  
Arm the theft-deterrent system.  
You can turn on the passive feature by moving the  
transmitter’s slider switch to ON. Now, when you move  
toward your vehicle with the key fob transmitter, the  
system will automatically disarm your theft-deterrent  
system and unlock the driver’s door or both depending  
on how the system is programmed. If it’s dark enough  
outside, your interior lamps will come on.  
Sound the horn and/or flash the exterior lamps to let  
you know the doors are locked (if you have set your  
options to do so). See “Driver Information Center  
Controls and Displays” in the Index.  
You can also use the buttons on the transmitter to  
actively unlock your vehicle. Press UNLOCK once to  
unlock the driver’s door, or press UNLOCK again  
within 10 seconds to unlock both doors.  
Turn off the interior lamps.  
The system has a feature that makes it difficult for you  
to lock your keys in your vehicle. If you leave your keys  
in the ignition and attempt to lock the doors, the vehicle  
will not lock and a chime will sound to remind you that  
the keys are in the ignition. If the door lock is pressed  
again, within five seconds, the doors will lock and the  
keys can be locked in the vehicle. If you leave the keys  
in the ignition and move away with the key fob  
transmitter, the doors still will not lock. You should  
notice that the horn doesn’t sound.  
Your memory settings will also be recalled when you  
press the active door UNLOCK button on the key  
fob transmitter. See “Memory” in the Index for  
more information.  
The hatch/trunk lid will unlock when the button with the  
trunk symbol is pressed, as long as the ignition is turned  
to OFF.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
The system will allow you to lock your keys in the  
vehicle if you didn’t leave them in the ignition (for  
example, you leave the keys on the seat). You should,  
however, be able to use the key fob transmitter to get  
them out as long as the passive slide switch is in the ON  
position. After 15 seconds of no motion, the key fob  
transmitter shuts down to save the battery. Wait about  
30 seconds, then rock the vehicle. The key fob  
RFA Settings  
You can adjust the settings on the system through the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). You can have just the  
driver’s or both doors lock passively unlock, change the  
type of alarm used by the theft-deterrent system, or have  
the lamps come on when you approach the vehicle. See  
“Driver Information Center Controls and Displays” in  
the Index for more information.  
transmitter should “wake up” and unlock the doors.  
This system can’t guarantee that you will never be  
locked out of your vehicle. If the battery is low or if the  
key fob transmitter is in a place where the signal can’t  
get to the antenna, it won’t unlock the doors. Always  
remember to take your keys with you.  
Turning the System Off  
You can disable the passive feature by moving the  
transmitter’s slider switch to OFF. The vehicle will no  
longer automatically disarm your theft-deterrent system  
or unlock the doors. However, you will be able to  
actively control the use of the door locks, the  
hatch/trunk lid release and the panic alarm using the  
four transmitter buttons. (These buttons also work  
when the passive feature is on.)  
Panic Alarm Button  
When you press the special horn button on the key fob  
transmitter, the horn will sound. This panic alarm button  
will allow you to attract attention, if needed.  
Make sure to fully slide the switch to either side when  
turning the key fob transmitter on and off. You  
should feel a double click when sliding the switch back  
and forth.  
If the horn alarm sounds, there are three ways to turn  
it off:  
Push the panic alarm button again on the key  
fob transmitter.  
You can also check whether the passive system is on or  
off by closing the door and moving away from the  
vehicle with the key and key fob transmitter. If the doors  
lock, the passive system is on.  
Wait 90 seconds, and the horn will turn off by itself.  
Turn the key to any position in the ignition,  
except OFF.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The active range (using one of the four buttons) of the  
key fob transmitter is approximately 60 to 100 feet  
(18 to 30 m). The passive range (having the slider  
switch set to ON) is approximately 10 to 20 feet  
(3 to 6 m) on the passenger’s side of the vehicle and  
20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 m) on the driver’s side.  
If you are working around your vehicle and keeping  
your keys with you, you might want to turn the RFA  
passive system off. If you don’t, the transmitter will  
keep locking and unlocking your doors.  
Transmitter Range  
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle  
Each key fob transmitter is coded to prevent another  
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter  
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through  
your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining  
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When  
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your  
vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be  
matched. Once your dealer has coded the new  
transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your  
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only three transmitters  
matched to it.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
To match transmitters to your vehicle:  
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.  
The programming mode will shut off if:  
You don’t program any transmitters for two minutes.  
You take the key out of the ignition.  
2. Clear any warning messages on the Driver  
Information Center (DIC) by pressing the  
RESET button.  
You have programmed three transmitters.  
Battery Replacement  
Under normal use, the battery in your key fob  
transmitter should last about 18 months.  
3. Press the OPTIONS button on the DIC several times  
until the blank page is displayed, then press and hold  
the RESET button for two seconds.  
4. When the message FOB TRAINING is displayed,  
push the RESET button once. The message  
HOLD LK + UNLK 1ST FOB in the DIC will  
be displayed.  
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t  
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to  
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,  
it’s probably time to change the battery.  
5. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on  
the transmitter simultaneously for 15 seconds.  
NOTICE:  
6. When a transmitter is learned (matched), the DIC  
will display FOB LEARNED and then prompt you  
to learn the next transmitter.  
When replacing the battery, use care not to  
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your  
body transferred to these surfaces may damage  
the transmitter.  
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each additional transmitter.  
8. Remove the key from the ignition.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
1. Insert a coin into the slot on the back of the  
Replacing the Battery in the Key  
Fob Transmitter  
transmitter and gently pry apart the front and back.  
2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.  
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)  
side up. Use a battery, type CR2450, or equivalent.  
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put it  
together so water won’t get in.  
5. Resynchronize the transmitter. (See  
“Resynchronizing Your Transmitter” following.  
6. Test the transmitter.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Resynchronizing Your Transmitter  
Remote Hatch/Trunk Lid Release  
Your RFA system uses a continually changing code for  
increased security. Normally, the receiver in your  
vehicle will keep track of this changing code. If your  
vehicle does not respond to your transmitter, do the  
following to determine what’s wrong:  
1. Get closer to the vehicle and try pressing a button  
again. Your battery may be low (If so, see “Battery  
Replacement” in the Index).  
2. While standing close to your vehicle, press the  
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on your transmitter at  
the same time and hold for seven seconds. This will  
attempt to resynchronize the security code in your  
RFA key fob transmitter.  
3. When resynchronization is achieved, the horn  
will chirp.  
To use the remote hatch/trunk lid release on automatic  
transmission vehicles, your vehicle must be in PARK (P)  
or NEUTRAL (N). For manual transmissions, set the  
parking brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.  
Loss of synchronization will occur after transmitter  
battery replacement or disconnection of the  
vehicle’s battery.  
Press the button with the trunk symbol on it, located at  
the left-hand side of the steering column on the  
instrument panel, to release the hatch/trunk lid from  
inside your vehicle.  
If attempts to resynchronize your transmitter to the  
vehicle are not successful, you may need to match the  
transmitter to the vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s)  
to Your Vehicle” in the Index.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
The key fob transmitter will also release the hatch/trunk lid.  
See “Remote Function Actuation System” in the Index.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a convertible  
top/hardtop and you have lost battery power, use the  
manual release cable to open the trunk lid. To access the  
cable, remove the center storage compartment lid  
located in the rear of the trunk area. (See “Rear Storage  
Compartments” in the Index for more information.)  
If your vehicle is equipped with a hatch and you have  
lost battery power, use the manual release cables to open  
the hatch. To access the cables, remove the two access  
panels located in the rear of the trunk area. There is one  
cable located under each access panel. (See “Rear  
Storage Compartments” in the Index for  
more information.)  
Pull the cable straight down to release the trunk lid.  
Pull each cable straight down for each latch to release  
the hatch.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
NOTICE:  
CAUTION:  
If you put things in the hatch/trunk area, be sure  
they won’t break the glass when you close it.  
It can be dangerous to drive with the hatch/trunk  
lid open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can  
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell  
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.  
Never slam the hatch/trunk lid down. You could  
break the glass or damage the defogger grid.  
When you close the hatch/trunk lid, make sure  
you pull down from the center, not the sides. If  
you pull the hatch/trunk lid down from the side  
too often, the weatherstrip can be damaged.  
If you must drive with the hatch/trunk lid open  
or if electrical wiring or other cable connections  
must pass through the seal between the body and  
the hatch/trunk lid:  
Make sure all other windows are shut.  
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling  
system to its highest speed with the setting  
on BI-LEVEL or VENT. That will force  
outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort  
Controls” in the Index.  
NOTICE:  
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the rear  
storage compartments located in the hatch/trunk  
area. If you do, the objects could damage  
the underbody.  
If you have air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel, open them all the way.  
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Parking Lots  
Theft  
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching  
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.  
But what if you have to leave your key? Do not leave  
valuables in your vehicle, since there would be no place  
to secure them.  
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.  
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent  
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make  
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you  
can help.  
Universal Theft-Deterrent System  
Key in the Ignition  
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an  
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so  
don’t do it.  
Your vehicle has  
a theft-deterrent  
alarm system.  
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,  
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key  
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.  
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your  
ignition. If you take the key with you, and you have an  
automatic transmission, it will be locked. And remember  
to lock the doors.  
With this system, the SECURITY light will flash as you  
open the door (if your ignition is off). This light reminds  
you to arm the theft-deterrent system.  
Parking at Night  
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your  
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.  
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the horn  
works. If not, check the horn fuse. See “Fuses and  
Circuit Breakers” in the Index. If the horn works, but the  
alarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer.  
Arming the System  
Use one of the following items listed here to arm  
the system:  
Press the LOCK button on the key fob transmitter,  
Walk out of range with the passive switch on, or  
Disarming the System  
Always use your key or the key fob transmitter to  
unlock a door. Unlocking a door any other way will set  
off the alarm. If your alarm sounds, listed below are the  
ways you can disarm it:  
Open the door. (The SECURITY light should flash.)  
Lock the door with the power door lock switch. The  
SECURITY light will stop flashing and stay on.  
Close the door. The SECURITY light should go off.  
Unlock any door with your key.  
Put the key in the ignition.  
Testing the Alarm  
Use the following to test the system:  
Press the UNLOCK button on the key  
fob transmitter.  
1. Make sure the hatch/trunk lid is latched and set the  
passive switch on the key fob transmitter to OFF.  
Walk into range with the passive switch on.  
2. Lower a window on the door.  
3. Manually arm the system.  
4. Close the doors and wait 15 seconds.  
5. Reach through the open window and unlock the  
door. Now open the door. The alarm should sound.  
6. Turn off the alarm.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Now, if a door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened without  
the key or the key fob transmitter, the alarm will go off.  
Your horn will sound for two minutes, then it will go off  
to save battery power. And, your vehicle won’t start.  
PASS-Key uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key that  
matches a decoder in your vehicle.  
When the PASS-Key system senses that someone is  
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter  
and fuel systems. For about three minutes, the starter  
won’t work and fuel won’t go to the engine. If someone  
tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key  
during this time, the shutdown period will start over  
again. This discourages someone from randomly trying  
different keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt  
to make a match.  
The theft-deterrent system won’t arm if you lock the  
doors with a key, the manual door lock, or if you use the  
power door lock after the doors are closed.  
If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave  
with the keys, have the passenger lock the vehicle after  
the doors are closed. This way the alarm won’t arm, and  
your passenger won’t set it off.  
The key must be clean and dry before it’s inserted in the  
ignition or the engine may not start. If the SECURITY  
light comes on, the key may be dirty or wet.  
PASS-Key  
Your vehicle is equipped  
with the PASS-Key  
If this happens and the starter won’t work, turn the  
ignition off. Clean and dry the key, wait three minutes  
and try again. If the starter still won’t work, wait three  
minutes and try the other ignition key. At this time, you  
may also want to check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit  
Breakers” in the Index). If the starter won’t work with  
the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle  
does start, the first ignition key may be faulty. See your  
dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key.  
(Personalized Automotive  
Security System)  
theft-deterrent system.  
PASS-Key is a passive  
theft-deterrent system. It  
works when you insert or  
remove the key from  
the ignition.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or  
missing resistor pellet, you will see no SECURITY  
light. You don’t have to wait three minutes before trying  
the proper key.  
New Vehicle “Break-In”  
NOTICE:  
If the resistor pellet is damaged or missing, the starter  
won’t work. Use the other ignition key, and see your  
dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key to  
have a new key made.  
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate  
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long  
run if you follow these guidelines:  
If the SECURITY light comes on while driving, have  
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.  
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or  
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).  
Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or  
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).  
Don’t make full-throttle starts.  
Avoid making hard stops for the first  
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time  
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken  
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean  
premature wear and earlier replacement.  
Follow this breaking-in guideline every  
time you get new brake linings.  
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key ignition key, see  
your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key.  
In an emergency, call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance  
Center at 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872).  
(In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.)  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
With the key in the ignition  
switch, you can turn the  
switch to four positions.  
Front Air Dam  
Your vehicle is equipped with a front air dam which has  
minimal ground clearance for aerodynamics. For this  
reason, the air dam has a spring- loaded hinge provided  
and it will retract with road contact.  
In normal operation, the air dam will occasionally  
contact some road surfaces (speed bumps, driveway  
ramps, etc.). This can be heard inside the vehicle as a  
scraping noise. This is normal and does not indicate  
a problem.  
OFF: The only position from which you can remove the  
key. Removing the key locks your steering wheel,  
ignition and automatic transmission.  
Use care when approaching bumps or objects on road  
surfaces and avoid them when possible.  
Ignition Positions  
CAUTION:  
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition  
switch can’t be turned to OFF unless the shift lever is  
in PARK (P).  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition  
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or  
others could be injured or even killed. They could  
operate power windows or other controls or even  
make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in  
the vehicle with children.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
ACC: This is an on position in which you can operate  
your electrical power accessories. With the key in this  
position, the automatic transmission and steering  
column will unlock.  
CAUTION:  
Removing the key from the ignition switch will  
lock the steering column and result in a loss of  
ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a  
collision. If you need to turn the engine off while  
the vehicle is moving, turn the key to ACC.  
ON: This is the position to which the switch returns  
after you start the engine and release the switch. The  
switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But even  
when the engine is not running, you can use ON to  
operate your electrical power accessories and to display  
some instrument panel messages and telltales.  
START: This position starts the engine. When the  
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will  
return to ON for normal driving.  
NOTICE:  
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you  
to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.  
If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t  
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if  
so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with  
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break  
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this  
works, then your vehicle needs service.  
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door  
when the ignition is in OFF or ACC and the key is in  
the ignition.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
Manual Transmission  
With RAP, your power windows and the audio system  
will continue to work for up to 15 minutes after the  
ignition key is turned to OFF and neither door is opened.  
If a door is opened, the power windows and audio  
system will shut off.  
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking  
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start  
the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is  
not all the way down -- that’s a safety feature.  
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn the  
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let  
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your  
engine gets warm.  
Starting Your Engine  
This vehicle has a computer system that monitors engine  
speed, throttle and pedal position, and records the  
current status.  
NOTICE:  
Automatic Transmission  
Holding your key in START for longer than  
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to  
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat  
can damage your starter motor. Wait about  
15 seconds between each try to help avoid  
draining your battery or damaging your starter.  
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).  
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a  
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,  
use NEUTRAL (N) only.  
NOTICE:  
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the  
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you  
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine  
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator  
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help  
avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.  
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Chevrolet  
is moving. If you do, you could damage the  
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your  
vehicle is stopped.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below  
0 F or -18 C), do this:  
NOTICE:  
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the  
ignition key to START and hold it there. When the  
engine starts, let go of the key. Use the accelerator  
pedal to maintain engine speed, if you have to, until  
your engine has run for a while.  
Your engine is designed to work with the  
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical  
parts or accessories, you could change the way  
the engine operates. Before adding electrical  
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,  
your engine might not perform properly.  
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then  
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.  
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the  
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in  
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts  
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but  
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.  
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.  
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see  
the part of this manual that tells how to do it  
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing  
Your Vehicle” in the Index.  
Starter Interlock Feature  
For your convenience and to avoid damage to your  
starter, your vehicle is equipped with a starter interlock  
feature. This feature will not allow you to crank the  
engine when the vehicle is already running.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Racing or Other Competitive Driving  
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)  
See your Warranty Book before using your vehicle for  
racing or other competitive driving.  
NOTICE:  
If you use your vehicle for racing or other  
competitive driving, your engine may use more  
oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels  
can damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil  
level often during racing or other competitive  
driving and keep the level at or near the upper  
mark on the engine oil dipstick. You may need  
to add oil. See “Adding Oil” under “Engine” in  
the Index.  
The engine coolant heater is located on the driver’s side  
of the engine under the manifold.  
In very cold weather, 0 F (-18 C) or colder, the engine  
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and  
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,  
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of  
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and  
store the cord as it was before to keep it away  
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could  
be damaged.  
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater  
1. Turn off the engine.  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.  
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged  
The electrical cord is attached to the generator  
bracket assembly, between the generator and the  
windshield washer fluid tank.With headlamps closed,  
route the cord in the opening between the left hand  
headlamp door and the fender panel. Do not pinch  
the cord when closing the hood.  
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the  
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of  
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact  
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your  
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that  
particular area.  
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.  
CAUTION:  
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet  
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong  
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause  
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the  
cord into a properly grounded three-prong  
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a  
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for  
at least 15 amps.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Automatic Transmission Operation  
CAUTION:  
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the  
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the  
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.  
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is  
running unless you have to. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.  
You or others could be injured. To be sure your  
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly  
level ground, always set your parking brake and  
move the shift lever to PARK (P).  
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.  
There are several different positions for your shift lever.  
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the  
best position to use when you start your engine because  
your vehicle can’t move easily.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before  
starting the engine. Your vehicle has a  
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,  
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see  
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.  
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to  
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift  
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you  
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift  
lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)  
and release the shift lever button as you maintain brake  
application. Then press the shift lever button and move  
the shift lever into the gear you wish. If you do not  
apply the brake after 15 seconds once the ignition is  
turned on, you will receive a PRESS BRAKE BEFORE  
SHIFT message in the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.  
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t  
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re  
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use  
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.  
CAUTION:  
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while  
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is  
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the  
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very  
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or  
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or  
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.  
NOTICE:  
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.  
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle  
is moving forward could damage your  
transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after  
your vehicle is stopped.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but  
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.  
It can help control your speed as you go down steep  
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use  
your brakes off and on.  
NOTICE:  
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting  
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the  
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.  
If you manually select SECOND (2) when you start the  
vehicle, the transmission will drive (and stay) in second  
gear. You may use this feature for reducing torque to the  
rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle  
from a stop on slippery road surfaces, or for preventing  
the transmission from downshifting into FIRST (1) in  
situations where a downshift would be undesirable.  
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ): This position is for  
normal driving.  
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal  
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel  
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ).  
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power  
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can  
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the  
selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the transmission  
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going  
slowly enough.  
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)  
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ):  
When driving on hilly, winding roads.  
When going down a steep hill.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Manual Transmission Operation  
6-Speed  
NOTICE:  
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to  
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in  
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid  
object. You could damage your transmission.  
This is your shift pattern.  
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold  
your vehicle there with only the accelerator  
pedal. This could overheat and damage the  
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into  
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on  
a hill.  
Here’s how to operate your transmission:  
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline  
components from improper operation.  
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into  
FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as  
you press the accelerator pedal.  
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less  
than 40 mph (64 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete  
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift  
lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press  
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Your six-speed manual transmission has a feature that  
allows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R) while the  
vehicle is rolling (at less than 3 mph (5 km/h)). You will  
be locked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R)  
while your vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph  
(5 km/h). If you have turned your ignition off and  
wish to park your vehicle in REVERSE (R), you will  
have to move the shift lever quickly to the right, and  
immediately forward into gear.  
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on  
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then,  
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the  
accelerator pedal.  
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) AND SIXTH  
(6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and  
SIXTH (6) the same way you do for SECOND (2).  
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the  
accelerator pedal.  
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)  
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the  
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the  
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to  
NEUTRAL (N).  
CAUTION:  
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or  
idle your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL (N)  
when it is centered in the shift pattern, not in any  
other gear.  
If you skip more than one gear when you  
downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle.  
You could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift  
down more than one gear at a time when you  
down shift.  
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch  
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Just apply pressure  
to get the lever past FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) into  
REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while  
pressing the accelerator pedal.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear  
for the best fuel economy.  
NOTICE:  
When you are shifting gears, don’t move the  
gearshift lever around needlessly. This can  
damage parts of the transmission and may  
require costly repair. Shift directly into the next  
appropriate gear.  
One to Four Light (Manual Transmission)  
When this light comes on,  
you can only shift from  
FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4)  
instead of FIRST (1) to  
SECOND (2).  
If your engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or if the  
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to  
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or  
more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for  
good engine performance.  
You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to  
deactivate this feature. This helps you get the best  
possible fuel economy.  
After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift to a  
lower gear if you prefer.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
NOTICE:  
NOTICE:  
Do not try to force the shift lever into  
SECOND (2) or THIRD (3) when the 1 TO  
4 SHIFT light comes on. Do not try to re-engage  
FIRST (1) after starting to shift into  
If you skip more than one gear when you  
downshift, or if you race the engine when you  
downshift, you can damage the clutch, driveshaft  
or transmission.  
FOURTH (4). You will damage your  
transmission. Shift only from FIRST (1) to  
FOURTH (4) when the light comes on.  
The six-speed transmission has a spring that centers the  
gearshift lever near THIRD (3) and FOURTH (4). This  
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you  
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from FIRST (1) to  
SECOND (2) or downshifting from SIXTH (6) to  
FIFTH (5). The spring will try to pull the gearshift lever  
toward FOURTH (4) and THIRD (3). Make sure you  
move the lever into SECOND (2) or FIFTH (5). If you  
let the gearshift lever move in the direction of the  
pulling, you may end up shifting from FIRST (1) to  
FOURTH (4) or from SIXTH (6) to THIRD (3).  
This light will come on when:  
The engine coolant temperature is higher than  
169 F (76 C),  
you are going 15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h) and  
you are at 21 percent throttle or less.  
Downshifting (Manual Transmission)  
Do not downshift into the gear shown below at a speed  
greater than shown in the table:  
FIRST (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mph (80 km/h)  
SECOND (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 mph (119 km/h)  
THIRD (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 mph (163 km/h)  
FOURTH (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 mph (209 km/h)  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Parking Brake  
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.  
Hold the release button in as you move the parking  
brake lever all the way down.  
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.  
Pull the parking brake lever. This sets your parking  
brake. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning  
light will come on.  
NOTICE:  
Driving with the parking brake on can cause  
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to  
replace them, and you could also damage other  
parts of your vehicle. Make sure the brake  
warning light is not on before driving.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Shifting Into PARK (P)  
(Automatic Transmission Only)  
CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if  
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the  
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.  
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle  
can move suddenly. You or others could be  
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even  
when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps  
that follow.  
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the  
button on the lever and pushing the lever all the way  
toward the front of the vehicle.  
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and  
set the parking brake.  
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.  
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can  
remove the key from the ignition, the vehicle is in  
PARK (P).  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine  
Running (Automatic Transmission Only)  
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)  
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your  
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the  
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in  
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the  
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”  
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then  
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the  
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into  
PARK (P)” in the Index.  
CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the  
engine running. Your vehicle could move  
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)  
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you  
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could  
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could  
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the  
engine running unless you have to.  
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of  
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.  
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another  
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the  
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so  
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).  
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine  
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your  
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After  
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down  
the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the shift  
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it  
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever  
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on  
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into  
PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you  
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever  
button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.  
Shifting Out of PARK (P)  
(Automatic Transmission)  
CAUTION:  
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t  
shift out of PARK (P), try this:  
Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must fully  
apply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can roll.  
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle  
can move suddenly. You or others could  
be injured.  
1. Turn the key to ACC.  
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.  
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).  
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear  
you want.  
Your vehicle has a Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock  
(BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brake  
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition  
is in ON. See “Automatic Transmission Operation” in  
the Index.  
5. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soon  
as possible.  
Parking Your Vehicle  
(Manual Transmission)  
Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual  
transmission in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the  
parking brake.  
As a prompt, you will see a message in the Driver  
Information Center (DIC) that will say PRESS BRAKE  
BEFORE SHIFT within 15 seconds unless the brake  
is pressed.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Parking Over Things That Burn  
Engine Exhaust  
CAUTION:  
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas  
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or  
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.  
You might have exhaust coming in if:  
Your exhaust system sounds strange  
or different.  
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.  
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.  
Your vehicle was damaged when driving  
over high points on the road or over  
road debris.  
Repairs weren’t done correctly.  
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been  
modified improperly.  
CAUTION:  
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into  
your vehicle:  
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust  
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park  
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that  
can burn.  
Drive it only with all the windows down to  
blow out any CO; and  
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Running Your Engine While You’re  
Parked (Automatic Transmission)  
CAUTION:  
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you  
ever have to, here are some things to know.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if  
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the  
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.  
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is  
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.  
You or others could be injured. To be sure your  
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly  
level ground, always set your parking brake and  
move the shift lever to PARK (P).  
CAUTION:  
Idling the engine with the climate control  
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into  
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under  
“Engine Exhaust”).  
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly  
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if  
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place  
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with  
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a  
garage with the engine running.  
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t  
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.  
Limited-Slip Rear Axle  
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional  
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works  
like a standard axle most of the time, but when one  
of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,  
this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move  
the vehicle.  
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.  
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
This switch is on the center console. Turn it to select the  
Selective Real Time Damping  
(SRTD) (Option)  
You may have a ride control system on your vehicle  
called Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD). The  
system provides the following performance benefits:  
suspension characteristic of your choice.  
TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving. This  
setting provides a smooth, soft ride.  
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal  
preference demand more control. This setting provides  
more “feel,” or response to the road conditions.  
Reduced Impact Harshness  
Improved Road Isolation  
PERF: Use for performance driving. This setting  
provides a tight, firm ride and precise response to  
road conditions.  
Improved High-Speed Stability  
Improved Handling Response  
You can select a setting at any time. Based on road  
conditions, steering wheel angle and your vehicle speed,  
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best ride  
and handling. Select a new setting whenever driving  
conditions change.  
There are three Driver Information Center (DIC)  
messages that are displayed when a malfunction occurs  
with the SRTD system. Refer to “DIC Warnings and  
Messages” in the Index.  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Both the driver’s and passenger’s window switches will  
have the express-down feature. Tap AUTO and  
immediately release. The window will lower completely.  
To stop the express-down feature from lowering the  
window completely, simply tap the switch again.  
Windows  
Power Windows  
With power windows, switches on the door control each  
window when the ignition is on or when RAP is present.  
(See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in the Index.)  
You can also open the window any amount by pressing  
and releasing the switch.  
Express-Down Windows  
Horn  
To sound the horn, press either horn symbol on the  
steering wheel.  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Telescopic Steering Wheel (Option)  
Tilt Wheel  
The switch to operate the  
telescopic steering wheel is  
located on the right-hand  
side of the steering column.  
To operate the telescopic wheel, push the switch forward  
and the wheel moves away from the driver. Pull the  
switch rearward and the wheel moves toward the driver.  
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel.  
The telescopic steering wheel position can be stored  
with your memory settings. See “Memory” in the Index  
for more information.  
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your  
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.  
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the  
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a  
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the  
steering wheel into place.  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Turn and Lane Change Signals  
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two  
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you  
to signal a turn or a lane change.  
To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all the  
way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever  
will return automatically.  
An arrow on the instrument  
cluster will flash in the  
direction of the turn or  
lane change.  
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever  
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you  
complete your lane change. The lever will return by  
itself when you release it.  
The multifunction lever on the left-hand side of the  
steering column includes your:  
Turn Signal and Lane Change Control  
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
Cruise Control  
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash  
faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out.  
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an  
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you  
signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out  
bulbs. (See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.)  
Headlamps Switch  
Flash-to-Pass  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Turn Signal on Chime  
Turn the band to this symbol to turn on the  
headlamps and other operating lamps.  
A chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on  
for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving.  
Turn the band to this symbol to turn on the  
parking and other operating lamps except for  
the headlamps.  
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than  
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it  
back on.  
Turn the band to OFF to turn off the lamps.  
To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn on the  
parking lamps.  
Headlamps  
The headlamp band on the turn signal/multifunction  
lever controls these lamps:  
Headlamps  
Taillamps  
Parking lamps  
Sidemarker lamps  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Headlamp Doors  
You can open the doors manually using the knob next to  
the headlamp assembly. Turn the knob counterclockwise  
until the doors are open.  
The headlamp doors should be open when driving in icy  
or snowy conditions to prevent the doors from freezing  
closed and when washing the vehicle to help clean  
the headlamps.  
NOTICE:  
In order to avoid possible contact of the hood to  
the headlamp doors, care should be taken in  
raising the hood with the headlamps up, or shut  
off the headlamps prior to opening the hood.  
The headlamp doors are designed to open when you turn  
the headlamps on, and close when you turn the  
headlamps and parking lamps off. If you turn the  
headlamps on, then turn the headlamp switch back to  
the parking lamps setting, the headlamp doors will  
stay open.  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
Windshield Wipers  
To change the headlamps  
from low beam to high or  
high to low, push the turn  
signal lever all the way  
forward.  
When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument  
panel also will be on. To change the headlamps from  
high to low, pull the lever rearward.  
Lamps on Reminder  
If you turn the ignition off and leave the headlamps or  
parking lamps on and open the door, you will hear a  
chime reminding you to turn off all lamps.  
You can control the windshield wipers by moving the  
lever with the wiper symbol on it. This lever is located  
on the right side of the steering column.  
Flash-to-Pass  
For a single wiping cycle, push the lever down to MIST.  
Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The  
wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more  
cycles, hold the lever on MIST longer.  
Momentarily pull the turn signal lever toward you. The  
high-beam indicator will flash to indicate to the other  
driver that you intend to pass. If the low-beam  
headlamps are off and you have the optional fog lamps  
on, the fog lamps will flash.  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay  
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or  
snow. Push the lever up to INT (intermittent), then turn  
the band, located on the lever, to adjust the delay time.  
Rotate the band up for a shorter delay, down for a longer  
delay. The wiper speed can only be adjusted when the  
lever is in the INT position, not in HI or LO.  
Windshield Washer  
The lever on the right side of the steering column also  
controls the windshield washer. There is a push button at  
the end of the lever. To spray washer fluid on the  
windshield, push the button and hold it. The washer will  
spray until you release the button. The wipers will  
continue to clear the window for about six seconds after  
the button is released and then stop or return to your  
preset speed.  
For steady wiping at low speed, move the lever up to the  
LO position. For steady high-speed wiping, move the  
lever up further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move the  
lever down to OFF.  
CAUTION:  
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades  
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,  
carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become  
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.  
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until  
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer  
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking  
your vision.  
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuit  
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away  
snow or ice to prevent an overload.  
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,  
the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear on the  
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will take  
60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this message to  
turn off. For information on the correct washer fluid  
mixture to use, see “Windshield Washer Fluid” and  
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the  
cruise set speed in a digital number. For example, the  
DIC will say CRUISE SET 60 mph (97 km/h). When  
Cruise Control  
you apply the brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise  
control disengages. The DIC will show CRUISE  
DISENGAGED. See “DIC Warnings and Messages” in  
the Index.  
CAUTION:  
Cruise control can be dangerous where you  
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,  
don’t use your cruise control on winding  
roads or in heavy traffic.  
Cruise control can be dangerous on  
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes  
in tire traction can cause needless wheel  
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t  
use cruise control on slippery roads.  
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about  
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot  
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.  
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about  
25 mph (40 km/h).  
When using cruise control, the accelerator pedal will  
return to its fully-released position and will not move  
while cruise control is engaged.  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction  
Control System begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise  
control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction  
Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions  
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise  
control back on.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed and  
then you apply the brake or clutch pedal. This, of  
course, disengages the cruise control. But you don’t  
need to reset it.  
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,  
you can move the cruise control switch to R/A  
(Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second. The  
Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the cruise  
set speed.  
Setting Cruise Control  
CAUTION:  
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and  
stay there.  
If you leave your cruise control switch on when  
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button  
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You  
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the  
cruise control switch off until you want to use it.  
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control  
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:  
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.  
The speed will not begin to increase until sufficient  
pedal travel is achieved. Push the button at the end of  
the lever, then release the button and the accelerator  
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.  
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.  
2. Get up to the speed you want.  
3. Push the SET button at the end of the lever and  
release it. The cruise set speed will be displayed by  
the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display  
the cruise set speed.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The pedal  
will return to an “idle” position.  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control  
Move the cruise switch to R/A. Hold it there until  
you get up to the speed you want, then release the  
switch. (To increase your speed in very small  
amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly, then  
release it. Each time you do this, the vehicle will go  
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)  
Use the accelerator pedal to increase speed. When you  
take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down  
to the cruise control speed you set earlier.  
Using Cruise Control on Hills  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display  
the cruise set speed.  
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends  
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.  
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to  
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,  
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many  
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use  
cruise control on steep hills.  
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control  
There are two ways to reduce speed while using  
cruise control:  
Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until  
you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.  
Ending Cruise Control  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display  
the cruise set speed.  
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:  
Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch  
pedal, if you have a manual transmission vehicle, or  
To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET  
button for less than half a second. Each time you do  
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.  
Move the cruise switch to OFF.  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display  
the message “CRUISE DISENGAGED.”  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display  
the cruise set speed.  
Erasing Speed Memory  
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,  
cruise control set speed memory is erased.  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
When it’s dark enough outside, the front turn signal  
lamps will turn off and the headlamps and parking  
lamps will turn on. The other lamps that come on with  
the headlamps will also come on.  
Exterior Lamps  
Daytime Running Lamps / Automatic  
Headlamp Control (Optional)  
When it’s bright enough outside, the headlamps will go  
off and the front turn signal lamps will come on.  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for  
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.  
DRL can be helpful in many different driving  
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the  
short periods after dawn and before sunset.  
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking  
brake while the ignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start  
the vehicle. The DRL, headlamps and parking lamps  
will stay off until you release the parking brake.  
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the  
Automatic Headlamp Control (if equipped) work, so be  
sure it isn’t covered.  
The Automatic Headlamp Control feature can be turned  
on or off except for vehicles first sold in Canada. See  
“Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the Index to turn  
this feature on or off (if equipped with the Automatic  
Headlamp Control feature).  
The DRL/Automatic Headlamp Control system will  
make the front turn signal lamps come on when:  
the ignition is on,  
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular  
headlamp system when you need it.  
the headlamp switch is off and  
the parking brake is released.  
When the DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps  
will be on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker and  
other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t  
be lit up either.  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Fog Lamps (Option)  
Twilight Sentinel (Option)  
Twilight Sentinel provides a period of exterior  
illumination as you leave the vicinity of the vehicle. The  
feature is activated when the headlamps are on due to  
the optional Automatic Headlamp Control feature  
described previously in this section, and when the  
ignition is turned off. Your headlamps will then remain  
on until the headlamp switch is moved from OFF to the  
parking lamp position or until an illumination period has  
elapsed. See “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the  
Index to select the desired illumination period.  
If you turn off the ignition with the headlamp switch in  
the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight  
Sentinel cycle will not occur.  
You can customize the vehicle to activate the Twilight  
Sentinel when the ignition is turned off under the  
conditions listed previously, or you may choose not to  
activate this feature under any conditions. See “Driver  
Information Center (DIC)” in the Index to customize  
this feature.  
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty  
conditions. Your parking lamps or low-beam headlamps  
must be on or the fog lamps won’t work.  
To turn the fog lamps on, push the button located on the  
instrument panel to the left of the steering column. A  
light on the button will come on when the fog lamps are  
on. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off.  
2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Courtesy Lamps  
Interior Lamps  
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened, the  
interior lamps will go on (unless it’s bright outside). The  
lamps will stay on for about 30 seconds or until you turn  
on the ignition.  
Instrument Panel Brightness Control  
This knob controls the  
brightness of the instrument  
panel lights when the  
headlamps or parking lamps  
are on.  
You can also turn on the courtesy lamps by turning the  
interior brightness control knob all the way clockwise.  
Be sure not to have this knob turned all the way down  
with the lamps on during the day. Your Driver  
Information Center (DIC) may not be visible.  
Exit and Entry Lighting  
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when  
entering the vehicle for up to 20 seconds. With exit  
lighting, the interior lamps will come on when the key is  
turned to OFF or a door is ajar for about 20 seconds.  
Push and release the knob and it will pop out. Turn the  
knob clockwise to brighten the lights or  
counterclockwise to dim them.  
Parade Mode  
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly  
turning the headlamps on and off or by quickly turning  
the courtesy lamp switch on and off.  
The instrument panel brightness knob has an added feature  
called Parade Mode to assist you in seeing certain  
instrument panel controls if your headlamps are on in the  
daylight. Before turning the courtesy lamps on by turning  
the button all the way clockwise, the radio, Driver  
Information Center (DIC) display and heating and air  
conditioning controls will come on at their maximum  
brightness. This will occur only with the parking lamps or  
headlamps on.  
2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Reading Lamps  
Inadvertent Load Control  
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from  
draining the battery in case the underhood lamp, vanity  
mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console or  
glove box lamps are accidentally left on. If you leave  
any of these lamps on, they will automatically time out  
after 15 minutes. To reset it, all of the above lamps must  
be turned off or the ignition key must be in ON.  
Mirrors  
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror  
An inside rearview mirror is attached above the  
windshield. The mirror has pivots so that you can  
adjust it.  
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Pull  
the tab for night driving to reduce glare. Push the tab for  
daytime driving.  
Your inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.  
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When the  
doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on  
individually by pressing the switch (each lamp has its  
own switch).  
There is also an interior console flood lamp located  
underneath the rearview mirror which comes on with the  
headlamps or parking lamps.  
2-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
The electric mirror control is on the driver’s door. It  
controls the driver’s and passenger’s mirrors. To adjust  
either mirror, press the LT (left) or RT (right) button to  
select the mirror, then press the arrows to adjust the  
direction of the mirror. The selected mirror will stay on  
for 20 seconds after the last adjustment. An indicator  
light will come on above the mirror that you select.  
Power/Heated Remote Control Mirrors  
Your preferred mirror position can be stored if you have  
the memory option. See “Memory” in the Index.  
For operation of the heated outside mirrors, see “Rear  
Window Defogger” in the Index.  
2-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Convex Outside Mirror  
Center Console Storage  
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex  
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the  
driver’s seat.  
CAUTION:  
A convex mirror can make things (like other  
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.  
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you  
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your  
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before  
changing lanes.  
To use this storage area, pull up the lid on the driver’s  
side front edge of the console and swing it to the  
passenger’s side.  
Storage Compartments  
Instrument Panel Cupholder  
The cupholder is located on the center console in front of  
the ashtray. To open it, place your thumb on the left side  
of the lid and raise the right side with your index finger.  
You can use the key to lock and unlock the console.  
Don’t leave the key in the lock, or it could be damaged  
when the driver sits down.  
The fuel fill door release button and accessory power  
outlet are located inside the center console.  
2-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Security Shade (Option)  
Rear Storage Compartments  
The security shade can provide hidden storage in the  
rear area of the vehicle. The shade is also helpful in  
blocking the glare from the removeable roof when it is  
stored in the rear compartment.  
There are three rear storage compartments in the floor of the  
rear hatch/trunk area on the passenger’s and driver’s side.  
Using the Security Shade  
1. Hook the elastic loops  
on the front corners (A)  
of the shade to the  
T-nuts located on the  
front corners of the rear  
hatch frame.  
If you have a coupe or convertible model, your vehicle  
will be equipped three storage compartment lids. If you  
have a hardtop, your vehicle will only have a center  
storage compartment lid.  
2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B) of the  
shade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatch  
frame, near the rear corners.  
2-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
NOTICE:  
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional  
trunk-mounted CD changer, it is stored in the  
center rear storage compartment. To help avoid  
damage to the compact disc player, do not store  
items such as liquids or sharp objects that could  
damage, puncture or cut the trunk-mounted CD  
changer or wiring.  
NOTICE:  
To access a storage compartment, pull up on the latch to  
release the lid. Remove the storage compartment lid.  
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the storage  
compartments located in the hatch/trunk area. If  
you do, the objects could damage the underbody.  
When replacing a storage compartment lid, make sure  
the latch is in the correct location so the latch locks  
securely into place.  
2-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Convenience Net (Option)  
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You will see  
it on the back wall of the rear area of the vehicle.  
NOTICE:  
Loose objects (such as paper clips) can lodge  
behind and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent  
movement of the lid. Avoid putting small loose  
objects near the ashtray.  
Put small loads, like grocery bags, in the net. It can help  
keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick  
starts and stops. The convenience net is not for larger,  
heavier loads.  
You can unhook the net and place it in one of the rear  
storage pockets when you are not using it. On coupe  
models only, a vinyl storage bag has also been provided.  
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go.  
When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.  
Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter  
The ashtray is located on the instrument panel, next to  
the lighter. To use the ashtray, lift up on the bottom of  
the door.  
NOTICE:  
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand  
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to  
back away from the heating element when it’s  
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the  
lighter and the heating element.  
NOTICE:  
Don’t put papers and other things that burn  
into the ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other  
smoking materials could set them on fire,  
causing damage.  
2-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Sun Visors  
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You  
can also swing them to the side.  
NOTICE:  
When using the accessory power outlet:  
Visor Vanity Mirrors  
Pull down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the  
vanity mirror.  
The maximum load of any electrical  
equipment should not exceed 15 amps.  
Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment  
when not in use. Leaving electrical  
equipment on for extended periods can  
drain the battery.  
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors (Option)  
Pull down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the  
lighted vanity mirror. When the cover is lifted, the lamps  
will come on automatically, even if the ignition is off.  
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or your  
dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.  
Accessory Power Outlet  
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center  
console storage compartment, on the forward left-hand  
side. Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet. The  
outlet can be used to connect electrical equipment such  
as a cellular phone or CB radio. Be sure to follow the  
installation instructions included with the equipment.  
Replace the cap when the accessory power outlet is not  
in use.  
Floor Mats (Option)  
Your vehicle’s floor mats are specially designed to  
remain in position under your feet and out of reach of  
the accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held  
in place by two locator hooks and the passenger’s side is  
held in place by one.  
Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properly  
placed on the floor so that it does not block the  
movement of the accelerator pedal.  
2-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
How to Remove and Replace the Floor Mats  
Roof Panel (Option)  
To remove the floor mats,  
pull up on the rear of the  
mat to disconnect from the  
locator hooks.  
Removing the Roof Panel  
CAUTION:  
Don’t try to remove the roof panel while the  
vehicle is moving. Trying to remove the roof  
panel while the vehicle is moving could cause an  
accident. The panel could fall into the vehicle and  
cause you to lose control, or it could fly off and  
strike another vehicle. You or others could be  
injured. Remove the roof panel only when the  
vehicle is parked.  
To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in the  
floor mat over the locator hooks and push down  
into place.  
Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone, have  
someone help you.  
For proper cleaning instructions of the carpeted floor  
mats, see “Fabric Protection” in the Index.  
2-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
NOTICE:  
To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and  
weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on its  
edges. Place the roof panel in the egg-shaped  
stowage receivers after removing it from  
the vehicle.  
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly  
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).  
Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R).  
Turn the ignition key to OFF. Lower both sunshades  
and rotate them toward the door glass.  
3. Lower the windows and open the doors.  
2. Open the rear liftgate and remove any items that may  
interfere with proper storage of the roof panel.  
Also install the two egg-shaped stowage receivers  
into the floor of the rear storage compartment.  
Secure both receivers into their proper positions by  
turning them counterclockwise.  
2-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
There are two latches on the front of the roof panel  
near each door (A), and one rear latch (B).  
4. To unlock the front of the roof panel, pull down each  
of the front handles. Grasp the handles with your  
fingers and pull each toward you. Complete a 180  
rotation toward the center of the vehicle. Then push  
up on each of the handles.  
2-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
5. To unlock the rear of the roof panel, press the latch  
release button with your thumb and pull down the  
latch lever with your fingers.  
7. Stand on one side of the vehicle and, if necessary,  
have your helper stand on the other side. Together,  
carefully lift the front edge of the panel up and  
forward, and out of the vehicle opening.  
6. After releasing the latches, return the sun visors to  
the forward position.  
8. When the panel is loosened from the vehicle, one  
person should grasp the roof panel as close to  
the center of the vehicle as possible and lift away  
the panel.  
2-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
1. Turn the roof panel so that the rear edge of the panel  
is facing the storage area. The locating pins (at the  
rear of the panel) should point toward the  
egg-shaped stowage receivers on the floor of the  
center compartment.  
Storing the Roof Panel  
CAUTION:  
2. Push the panel forward until the pins bottom out in  
the receivers.  
If the roof panel is not stored properly, it could be  
thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden  
maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.  
Whenever you store the roof panel in the vehicle,  
always be sure that it is stored securely in the  
rear area using the storage pins.  
NOTICE:  
To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and  
weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on its  
edges. Place the roof panel in the egg-shaped  
stowage receivers after removing it from  
the vehicle.  
3. There are two spring-loaded storage pins on the rear  
wall of the storage compartment (A). These storage  
pins go into the slots on each side of the roof  
panel (B).  
2-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Installing the Roof Panel  
CAUTION:  
An improperly attached roof panel may fall into  
or fly off the vehicle. You or others could be  
injured. After installing the roof panel, always  
check that it is firmly attached by pushing up on  
the underside of the panel. Check now and then  
to be sure the roof panel is firmly in place.  
4. Gently lower the roof panel onto the carpet ledge.  
Then, pull each release rearward and upward to place  
the storage pins into the holes of the roof panel.  
NOTICE:  
To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and  
weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on  
its edges.  
5. Gently lift and lower the roof panel to be sure it is  
locked into place.  
2-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
1. Check to be sure that the front handles and rear latch  
on the ceiling are in their opened positions before  
attempting to install the roof panel.  
2. If the roof panel is stored in the rear area, grasp it  
with your right hand at the middle edge near the  
seatbacks, and with your left hand at the middle of  
the edge closest to you. Reverse the steps described  
previously under “Storing the Roof Panel.”  
3. Remove the roof panel from the  
storage compartment.  
4. In most cases, it is easier to install the removable  
roof with two people rather than one. Place the roof  
panel over the vehicle.  
5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to the  
weatherstrip on the back of the roof opening (A). Then  
align the pins at the rear of the roof panel weatherstrip  
with the receiving cup in the body weatherstrip (B).  
Gently lower the front edge of the roof panel to the  
front of the body opening (C).  
6. Rotate the front handles toward the side doors to the  
closed position.  
7. Hook the rear latch by pushing the lever up to the  
locked position.  
8. Grasp and tug the roof panel up and down and  
side-to-side to make sure the roof panel is  
securely installed.  
2-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
When lowering and raising the convertible top, you will  
Convertible Top (Option)  
The following procedures explain the proper operation  
of the convertible top.  
use the following:  
NOTICE:  
Certain automatic car washes may cause damage  
to the vehicle. The top fabric can be damaged by  
top cleaning brushes.  
For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see  
“Cleaning Your Convertible Top” in the index.  
A. Front Edge of the Convertible Top  
B. Rear Edge of the Convertible Top  
C. Storage Compartment Lid  
2-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Lowering the Convertible Top  
NOTICE:  
Don’t leave the convertible out with the top down  
for any long periods of time. The sun and rain  
can damage the seat material and other things  
inside the vehicle.  
1. Set the parking brake firmly. Shift an automatic  
transmission into PARK (P). Shift a manual  
transmission into REVERSE (R). Turn the ignition  
key to OFF. Lower both sunshades and rotate them  
toward the door glass.  
2. Unlock the front of the convertible top by lowering  
the latch handles and turning them inward. Push the  
latch handles back to the up position.  
NOTICE:  
Before lowering the convertible top into the  
storage area, be sure there are no objects in the  
way of the folded, stored top. The weight of a  
stored top on items in the storage area may cause  
the convertible top back glass to break.  
2-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
3. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of the convertible  
top off of the windshield frame. Then lift upward on  
the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to be vertical  
off the storage compartment lid (C). The front  
edge (A) and rear edge (B) should be straight up  
and down.  
4. Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and press the  
storage compartment release button located on the  
underside of the storage compartment lid (C) behind  
the driver’s seat. Then raise the storage compartment  
lid (C). While attempting to raise the lid, if the lid  
does not release and you hear three chimes, check to  
make sure the trunk lid is closed. Also, the lid will  
not release if the alarm is turned on or the trunk lid  
is open.  
After pressing the release button, the driver’s and  
passenger’s door glass should retract to the  
full-down position.  
2-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
If the vehicle has lost battery power, you can still  
open the storage compartment lid (C) using the  
manual release cable.  
NOTICE:  
Be sure that the rear edge (B) of the convertible  
top is in the full-down position before lowering  
the top into the storage compartment or damage  
to the top may occur.  
The cable is located underneath the carpeting behind  
the driver’s and passenger’s seats, in the center of the  
vehicle. When using the manual release, you must  
first open the doors to prevent damage to the seals.  
To access the cable, lift and pull back the carpeting.  
Then pull the cable to release the storage  
compartment lid if needed.  
5. Push forward on the front edge (A) of the convertible  
top to allow the rear edge (B) of the convertible top  
to be rotated to its full-down position.  
2-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Raising the Convertible Top  
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly  
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).  
Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R).  
Lower both windows and sunshades and turn the  
ignition key to OFF.  
6. Then move the top rearward to its  
fully-stored position.  
7. After the top is stored, apply one even push on the  
center of the front edge (A) of the convertible top to  
assure the top is fully retracted.  
8. Close the storage compartment lid (C) by closing  
with a swift, firm motion.  
2. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the storage  
compartment release button, or use the manual  
release cable if battery power has been lost. Lift the  
storage compartment lid (C). (After pressing the  
release button, the driver and passenger door glass  
should retract to the full-down position, if they have  
not already been lowered.)  
2-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
4. Lift the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to its  
full-up position by first raising the front edge (A).  
5. Close the storage compartment lid (C) by closing  
with a swift, firm motion.  
3. Pull the top up by firmly gripping the front edge (A)  
of the convertible top with your hand and applying a  
brisk, firm upward and forward motion to get the top  
in the full-up position.  
6. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible top by  
first slightly pushing the front edge (A) of the  
convertible top forward.  
7. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible top down  
from the outside of the vehicle, or pull the front edge  
(A) of the convertible top down from the center  
pull-down handle located in the inside of the vehicle.  
8. Rotate the latches outward to secure the top in the  
up position.  
2-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System  
2-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
The main components of your instrument panel are:  
A. HUD Controls (Option)  
M. Ignition Switch  
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
N. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown)  
C. Driver Information Center (DIC)  
(Located in the Instrument Cluster)  
O. Traction Control System (TCS) Switch/Active  
Handling Switch (Option)  
D. Instrument Panel Cluster  
E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever  
F. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons  
G. Hazard Warning Flasher Button  
H. Center Air Vent  
P. Accessory Power Outlet  
(Located in the Center Console)  
Q. Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD) (Option)  
R. Instrument Panel Cupholder  
S. Remote Fuel Door Release Button  
(Located in the Center Console)  
I. Audio System  
T. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter  
U. Parking Brake  
J. Comfort Controls  
K. Fog Lamp Button (Option)  
V. Glove Box  
L. Remote Hatch Release Button (Coupe) or Remote  
Trunk Release Button (Convertible/Hardtop)  
W. Instrument Panel Fuse Block  
2-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Instrument Panel Cluster  
Your instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance how the  
vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have left and many other things  
you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator warning lights, gages  
and DIC messages are explained on the following pages.  
2-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Speedometer and Odometer  
Tachometer  
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either miles  
per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).  
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands  
of revolutions per minute (rpm).  
You may note that there are not two separate scales for  
mph and km/h. When you press the E/M  
(English/Metric) button on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC), the cluster will calculate the proper speed  
and move the needle to the correct position. Either the  
MPH or the km/h telltale will illuminate, depending on  
which measurement you choose.  
Fuel will shut off at about 6200 rpm.  
If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off  
rpm, you could damage your engine. Be sure to operate  
your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or reduce your  
rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.  
Warning Lights, Gages and Messages  
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a  
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the  
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.  
If it can’t, then a new instrument cluster is replaced in  
the vehicle and a label must be put on the driver’s door  
to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer  
was installed. See your dealer if a new odometer must  
be replaced in your vehicle.  
This part describes the warning lights and gages that  
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you  
locate them.  
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an  
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to  
your warning lights and gages could also save you or  
others from injury.  
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a  
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you  
will see in the details on the next few pages, some  
warning lights come on briefly when you start the  
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are  
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed  
when this happens.  
2-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and  
warning lights work together to let you know when  
there’s a problem with your vehicle.  
The safety belt light will  
also come on and stay  
on until the driver’s belt  
is buckled.  
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on  
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows  
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you  
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.  
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even  
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights  
and gages. They’re a big help.  
Air Bag Readiness Light  
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument  
panel, which shows a deployed air bag symbol. The  
system checks the air bag’s electrical system for  
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical  
problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors,  
the air bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic  
module. For more information on the air bag system, see  
“Air Bag” in the Index.  
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center that  
works along with the warning lights and gages. See  
“Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the Index.  
Safety Belt Reminder Light  
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will  
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to  
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is  
already buckled.  
This light will come on  
when you start your engine,  
and it will flash for a few  
seconds. Then the light  
should go out. This means  
the system is ready.  
2-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The reading will change as the rate of charge changes  
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter  
reads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel and  
other systems may shut down. The Driver Information  
Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGE when your  
vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it checked right  
away. Driving with the voltmeter reading at 10 volts or  
below could drain your battery and disable your vehicle.  
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the  
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag  
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle  
serviced right away.  
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few  
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the  
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be  
ready to warn you if there is a problem.  
Brake System Warning Light  
Voltmeter  
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into  
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can  
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you  
need both parts working well.  
When the key is in ON with  
the engine not running, the  
voltmeter shows the voltage  
output of your battery.  
When the engine is running,  
it shows the voltage output  
of the charging system.  
This light should come on  
when you turn the ignition  
key to START.  
2-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be  
ready to warn you if there’s a problem. If this warning  
light stays on after you start the engine, the parking  
brake may not be set or there could be a brake problem.  
Refer to “Parking Brake” in the Index to see if it is set.  
If the parking brake is not set, have your brake system  
inspected right away.  
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light  
With the anti-lock brake  
system, the light will come  
on when you start your  
engine and may stay on  
for several seconds.  
That’s normal.  
If the light comes on while you are driving and you have  
a LOW BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC,  
pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that  
the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer  
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still  
on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing  
Your Vehicle” in the Index.)  
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the  
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as  
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine  
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or  
comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs  
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t  
on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock  
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also  
on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a  
problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System  
Warning Light” earlier in this section.  
CAUTION:  
Your brake system may not be working properly  
if the brake warning light is on. Driving with the  
brake warning light on can lead to an accident.  
If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the  
road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle  
towed for service.  
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come  
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the  
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be  
ready to warn you if there is a problem.  
2-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Traction Control System (TCS) Light  
Active Handling System Light  
This light should come on  
briefly as you start the  
engine. If the light doesn’t  
come on then, have it fixed  
so it will be ready to warn  
you if there’s a problem.  
If your vehicle has the  
optional Active Handling  
System, this light will come  
on briefly as you start the  
engine. If the light does not  
come on then, have it fixed  
so it will be ready to warn  
you if there is a problem.  
If it stays on, or comes on and the DIC shows a  
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message when you’re  
driving, there’s a problem with your TCS system and  
your vehicle needs service. When this light is on, the  
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving  
accordingly. If the driver turns off the Traction Control  
System by pressing the button on the console, the TCS  
system light will come on and the TRACTION  
If it stays on or comes on while you are driving, the  
Driver Information Center (DIC) shows a SERVICE  
ACTIVE HNDLG message and a chime sounds, there is  
a problem with your Active Handling System and your  
vehicle needs service. The driver can acknowledge this  
message by pressing the RESET button. When the  
SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message is displayed,  
the Active Handling System will not assist you in  
controlling the vehicle. You should have the system  
serviced as soon as possible. Adjust your  
SYSTEM OFF message will show on the DIC.  
driving accordingly.  
2-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
When the system is working, you will see the ACTIVE  
HANDLING message displayed in the DIC. You may  
also feel or hear the system working. This is normal.  
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage  
This gage shows the engine  
coolant temperature. If the  
gage pointer moves into the  
shaded area, your engine is  
too hot!  
If the driver turns off the Active Handling System by  
pressing the button on the console, the Active Handling  
System light will come on, a chime will sound, and the  
TRAC/ACT HNDLG OFF message will be displayed in  
the DIC. The Traction Control System will also be  
turned off. See “Driver Information Center Messages” in  
the Index for more information.  
If the Active Handling System and the Traction Control  
System are off, pressing the console button momentarily  
will turn both systems on. The DIC will display the  
TRAC/ACT HNDLG ON message, the instrument  
cluster light will be off, and a chime will sound. See  
“Driver Information Center Messages” in the Index  
for more information.  
This means that your engine coolant has overheated.  
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal  
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop  
your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as  
possible. (The larger tic marks are in increments of  
30 below 220 F (104 C) and in increments of  
10 above 220 F (104 C).)  
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to  
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.  
2-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
(Check Engine Light)  
NOTICE:  
Your vehicle is equipped  
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light  
on, after a while, your emission controls may not  
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as  
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.  
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be  
covered by your warranty.  
with a computer which  
monitors operation of the  
fuel, ignition and emission  
control systems.  
This system is called OBD II (On-Board  
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to  
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life  
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner  
NOTICE:  
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to  
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.  
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system  
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more  
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also  
designed to assist your service technician in correctly  
diagnosing any malfunction.  
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,  
exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the  
replacement of the original tires with other than  
those of the same Tire Performance Criteria  
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls  
and may cause the CHECK ENGINE light to  
come on. Modifications to these systems could  
lead to costly repairs not covered by your  
warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass  
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.  
2-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is  
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not  
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.  
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one  
of two ways:  
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,  
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.  
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the  
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light  
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,  
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your  
dealer or qualified service center for service.  
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been  
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and  
may damage the emission control system on your  
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis  
and service may be required.  
If the Light Is On Steady  
You may be able to correct the emission system  
malfunction by considering the following:  
Light On Steady -- An emission control system  
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.  
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and  
service may be required.  
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?  
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install  
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The  
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been  
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel  
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A  
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should  
turn the light off.  
If the Light Is Flashing  
The following may prevent more serious damage to  
your vehicle:  
Reducing vehicle speed.  
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?  
Avoiding hard accelerations.  
Avoiding steep uphill grades.  
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition  
will usually be corrected when the electrical system  
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.  
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If  
the Light Is On Steady” following.  
2-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?  
Engine Oil Pressure Gage  
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see  
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your  
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may  
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you  
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on  
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These  
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)  
This will be detected by the system and cause the light  
to turn on.  
The engine oil pressure  
gage shows the engine oil  
pressure in psi (pounds per  
square inch) or kPa  
(kilopascals) when the  
engine is running.  
If you experience one or more of these conditions,  
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one  
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.  
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).  
(In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot  
days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still be  
considered normal.) It may vary with engine speed,  
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above  
the shaded area show the normal operating range.  
Readings in the shaded area tell you that the engine is  
low on oil, or that you might have some other oil  
problem. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.  
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,  
have your dealer or qualified service center check the  
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and  
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical  
problems that may have developed.  
The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using the  
GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.  
2-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Security Light  
CAUTION:  
This light comes on to  
remind you to arm your  
theft-deterrent system. If it  
comes on and stays on when  
your ignition is on, there  
may be a problem with your  
theft-deterrent system.  
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If  
you do, your engine can become so hot that it  
catches fire. You or others could be burned.  
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your  
vehicle serviced.  
See “Universal Theft-Deterrent” and “PASS-Key  
System” in the Index.  
NOTICE:  
Check Gages Warning Light  
This light will come on  
briefly when you are  
starting the engine. If the  
light comes on and stays on  
while you are driving, check  
your gages to see if they are  
in the warning areas.  
Damage to your engine from neglected oil  
problems can be costly and is not covered by  
your warranty.  
2-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s).  
Pressing RESET will also turn off a DIC message but  
the LOW FUEL message will come on again in 10  
minutes if you have not added fuel to the vehicle.  
This light can come on for the following reasons:  
Low Oil Pressure  
High Coolant Temperature  
High or Low Battery Voltage  
Low Fuel Level  
Here are four things that some owners ask about. All  
these things are normal and do not indicate that anything  
is wrong with the fuel gage.  
Fuel Gage  
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the  
gage reads FULL (F).  
Your fuel gage tells you  
about how much fuel you  
have left when the ignition  
is on.  
It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage  
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it  
took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity to  
fill it.  
The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking  
or speeding up.  
The gage may not indicate EMPTY (E) when the  
ignition is turned off.  
When the needle approaches the red zone, RESERVE  
FUEL will appear on the Driver Information Center  
(DIC) display. When the needle approaches the  
“E,” LOW FUEL will appear on the display. At this  
time, you still have a little fuel left, but you should get  
more soon.  
2-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
You can use the Driver Information Center (DIC) to  
display more detailed fuel information. Each time you  
press FUEL, one of the following will appear in the  
Driver Information Center (DIC).  
Head-Up Display (Option)  
CAUTION:  
AVERAGE: The fuel economy calculated for the  
current tank of fuel, or since you last reset  
the display.  
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in  
your field of view, it may take you more time to  
see things you need to see when it’s dark outside.  
Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed  
low in your field of view.  
INST: The fuel economy calculated for your current  
driving conditions.  
RANGE: The distance you can drive  
before refueling.  
BLANK: The fuel gage is displayed alone.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display  
(HUD), you can see some of the driver information that  
appears on your instrument cluster.  
You should reset the fuel information display every time  
you refuel. To reset the display, press FUEL until  
AVERAGE appears. Then, press RESET on the Driver  
Information Center (DIC).  
2-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
There are five HUD selections that you can choose to  
view in the HUD display. By pressing and holding the  
PAGE button, you can scroll through these pages in the  
following order:  
The information may be displayed in English or metric  
units and appears as an image focused out toward the  
front of your vehicle. The HUD consists of the  
following information:  
Speedometer  
Speed Only  
Turn Signal Indicators  
Speed and Gage  
High-Beam Indicator Symbol  
Tachometer  
Speed, Tachometer and Gage  
Speed and Tachometer  
Tachometer Only  
Temperature, Oil and Fuel Gages  
Shift Light (Performance SHIFT Light)  
When you have chosen the desired HUD display, release  
the PAGE button.  
This light is used for performance driving to indicate  
that the vehicle’s best performance level has been  
reached to shift the transmission into the next higher  
gear. The SHIFT light will display at an engine  
speed of about 5,750 rpm, just prior to reaching the  
engine fuel cut-off mode. To better understand the  
vehicle’s power curves, see “Capacities and  
Specifications” in the Index.  
Gages can be scrolled through by tapping the PAGE  
button (only when a gage is displayed). The gages  
shown are:  
Oil Pressure  
Coolant Temperature  
Fuel Level  
Check Gages Icon  
The selections that you choose will remain in the HUD  
display until they are changed.  
2-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls  
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle  
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument  
panel, you may not see something important, such  
as a warning light. Under important warning conditions,  
the CHECK GAGES icon will illuminate in the HUD.  
View your Driver Information Center (DIC) for  
more information.  
The HUD controls are located to the left of the  
steering wheel.  
2-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
To change from English to metric units, push the E/M  
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly:  
button located to the right of the steering wheel.  
1. Start your engine and slide the HUD dimmer control  
all the way up.  
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove  
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of  
the HUD image.  
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by  
the ambient light conditions in the direction your  
vehicle is facing and where you have the HUD  
dimmer control set. If you are facing a dark object or  
a heavily shaded area, your HUD may anticipate that  
you are entering a dark area and may begin to dim.  
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a  
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it.  
Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the  
cleaner could leak into the unit.  
2. Adjust the seat to your driving position. If you  
change your seat position later, you may have to  
re-adjust your HUD.  
If the ignition is on and you can’t see the HUD image,  
check to see if:  
something is covering the HUD unit.  
3. Press the DISPLAY rocker switch up or down to  
center the HUD image in your view.  
the HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.  
the HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.  
NOTE: The HUD image can only be adjusted up and  
down, not side-to-side.  
ambient light (in the direction your vehicle is facing)  
is low.  
4. Slide the dimmer control downward until the HUD  
image is no brighter than necessary. To turn HUD  
off, slide the switch to OFF.  
a fuse is blown. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in  
the Index.  
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD  
system. If you ever have to have your windshield  
replaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUD or  
your HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.  
If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you may need  
to adjust the HUD brightness again using the dimmer  
control. Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD  
image harder to see.  
2-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
1 FUEL: Press this button to display fuel information  
such as fuel economy and range.  
Driver Information Center (DIC)  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display  
information about how your vehicle is functioning, as well  
as warning messages if a system problem is detected. The  
DIC display area is located in the instrument cluster below  
the speedometer and tachometer, directly above the  
steering column.  
2 GAGES: Use this button to display gage information  
like oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature,  
transmission fluid temperature, battery voltage and  
front/rear tire pressures.  
3 TRIP: Use this button to display your total and trip  
miles, the elapsed time function, your average speed and  
the engine oil life.  
The following buttons are on the DIC control panel which  
is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster.  
4 OPTIONS: This button allows you to choose personal  
options that are available on your vehicle, depending on  
the options your vehicle is equipped with, such as  
security, door locks, easy entry seats and language.  
5 E/M: Use this button to change the display between  
English and metric units.  
RESET: This button, used along with the other buttons,  
will reset system functions and turn off or acknowledge  
messages on the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
At the top of the DIC control buttons is a light sensor.  
Be sure not to block the sensor or your lighting  
functions may be disrupted.  
2-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
yellowblue  
DIC Controls and Displays  
1 FUEL  
Turn on the system by turning the ignition to ON. When  
you turn on the ignition, the DIC will be in the mode last  
displayed when the engine was turned off. Each DIC  
button allows you to scroll through a menu. A blank  
page ends each menu.  
The FUEL button displays average fuel economy and  
instantaneous fuel economy calculated for your specific  
driving conditions and range.  
If a problem is detected, a diagnostic message will appear  
on the display. Press RESET to acknowledge any current  
warning or service messages. The following pages will  
show the messages you can see on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) display by pressing the DIC buttons.  
Press the FUEL button to display average fuel economy,  
such as:  
AVERAGE 20.1 MPG or  
AVERAGE 5.3 L/100 km  
2-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The average fuel economy is viewed as a long-term  
approximation of your overall driving conditions. If you  
press RESET in this mode while you’re driving, the  
system will begin figuring fuel economy from that point  
in time.  
2 GAGES  
The GAGES button allows you to scroll through the  
functions listed below when you press it.  
Press FUEL again to display instantaneous fuel  
economy, such as:  
INST. 20.1 MPG or  
INST. 5.3 L/100 km  
Press FUEL again to display the range, such as:  
RANGE 20 MI or  
RANGE 32 km  
The range calculates the remaining distance you can  
drive without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and  
the fuel remaining in the tank.  
If the range is lower than 30 miles (48 km), the display  
will read RANGE LOW.  
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is  
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving  
conditions change, this data is gradually updated.  
Resetting the fuel range causes the fuel economy data to  
be updated immediately. Press RESET to reset the  
fuel range.  
Press the GAGE button to display the oil pressure,  
such as:  
OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or  
OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa  
2-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Press the GAGE button again to display the oil  
temperature, such as:  
Press the GAGE button again to display the tire pressure  
for the rear tires (left and right), such as:  
OIL TEMP 234 F or  
OIL TEMP 112 C  
REAR L34 R33 PSI or  
REAR L234 R228 kPa  
Note that tire pressure is not available until the vehicle  
has reached a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more.  
Press the GAGE button again to display the coolant  
temperature, such as:  
COOLANT TEMP 123 F or  
COOLANT TEMP 51 C  
3 TRIP  
The TRIP button allows you to scroll through the  
functions listed below when you press it.  
Press the GAGE button again to display the transmission  
fluid temperature (automatic transmission only),  
such as:  
TRANS FLUID 123 F or  
TRANS FLUID 51 C  
Press the GAGE button again to display the battery  
voltage, such as:  
BATTERY VOLTS 13.5  
Press the GAGE button again to display the tire pressure  
for the front tires (left and right), such as:  
FRONT L34 R33 PSI or  
FRONT L234 R228 kPa  
2-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Odometer  
Miles Since Last Ignition Feature  
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been  
driven in either miles or kilometers. Press the TRIP  
button to display odometer readings such as:  
You can also display number of miles driven since you  
last started the vehicle if you press and hold the RESET  
button for two seconds, then release. The miles (or  
kilometers) since the last ignition cycle will be set into  
the trip odometer.  
ODOMETER 12345 MI or  
ODOMETER 20008 km  
Elapsed Time  
Without the keys in the ignition, you can also display the  
odometer by turning on the parking lamps.  
Press the TRIP button until ELAP. TIME is displayed,  
such as ELAP. TIME 00: 00 : 00.  
Trip Odometers  
When the ignition is in ON, the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) can be used as a stopwatch. The display  
can show hours, minutes, seconds and hundredths of a  
second. The elapsed time indicator will record up to  
99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it will reset  
to zero and continue counting. (Hundredths are shown  
up to 59 minutes, 59 seconds and 99 hundredths).  
The display appears as ELAP. TIME 00: 00 : 00 in the  
elapsed time function.  
There are two trip odometers. Press the TRIP button and  
TRIP A will be displayed. Press it again and TRIP B  
will be displayed. TRIP A could be used to track the  
distance to a destination. TRIP B could be used to track  
maintenance periods.  
TRIP A 130.5 MI or  
TRIP A 209.9 km  
TRIP B 300.5 MI or  
TRIP B 483.5 km  
You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressing  
RESET. To reset the elapsed time to zero, stop the timer  
by pressing RESET. Then press and hold RESET until  
ELAP. TIME 00: 00 : 00 appears in the DIC.  
The trip odometers can be reset by pushing the RESET  
button on the DIC. Both of the trip odometers can be  
used simultaneously.  
2-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after  
Average Speed  
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful  
not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other  
than when the oil has just been changed. It can’t be reset  
accurately until the next oil change.  
Press the TRIP button until the average speed is  
displayed, such as:  
AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH or  
AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h  
To reset the Engine Oil Life Monitor, see “How to Reset  
the Engine Oil Life Monitor” in the Index.  
Press reset in this mode to start calculating the average  
speed. Press and hold RESET to clear.  
Also, see “Engine Oil, When to Change” and  
“Maintenance Schedule” in the Index.  
Engine Oil Life  
4 OPTIONS  
Press the TRIP button until the engine oil life is  
displayed, such as OIL LIFE REMAIN 89%.  
This button allows you to choose personal options that  
may be available on your vehicle, depending on the  
options your vehicle is equipped with, such as security,  
door locks, easy entry seats and language. Some of these  
functions work along with the key fob transmitter.  
This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaining useful  
life. It will show 99% when the system is reset after an  
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a  
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.  
When returning to the options menu, the first item of the  
options list will always be displayed, not the one you  
were last in when you changed buttons.  
When the remaining oil life is low, the system will alert  
you with the message CHANGE OIL SOON.  
When the oil life is down to zero, you will receive the  
message CHANGE OIL NOW.  
2-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Twilight  
Press the OPTIONS button until TWILIGHT - ON  
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to  
page through the following selections:  
TWILIGHT - ON  
DELAY TIME 1 2  
TWILIGHT - OFF  
If you choose TWILIGHT - ON, the next message  
DELAY TIME 1 2 will appear in the DIC. Use the  
OPTIONS button to switch between delay time 1 and 2.  
You can increase the delay time by pressing button 1 or  
decrease the time by pressing button 2. Each bar is equal  
to 12 seconds.  
Lock and Arm  
The following are the options listed under the  
OPTIONS button:  
Press the OPTIONS button until LOCK & ARM  
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to  
page through the following selections:  
LOCK & ARM - OFF  
LOCK & ARM - HORN ONLY  
LOCK & ARM - LIGHTS ONLY  
LOCK & ARM - HORN & LIGHTS  
2-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
If you choose ALARM HORN & LIGHTS, the horn  
will sound and the interior and exterior lamps will flash  
during an alarm.  
If you choose LOCK & ARM - OFF, you will  
receive no security feedback when locking or unlocking  
your vehicle.  
If you choose LOCK & ARM - HORN ONLY, only the  
horn will chirp to let you know when your alarm system  
has armed when locking your vehicle.  
Passive Unlock  
Press the OPTIONS button until PASSIVE UNLOCK  
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to  
page through the following selections:  
If you choose LOCK & ARM - LIGHTS ONLY,  
only your exterior lamps will flash to let you know  
when your alarm system has armed when locking  
your vehicle.  
PASSIVE UNLK DRIVER  
PASSIVE UNLOCK BOTH  
If you choose LOCK & ARM - HORN & LIGHTS, the  
horn will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash briefly  
to let you know the system has armed when locking  
your vehicle.  
If you choose the PASSIVE UNLK DRIVER, only the  
driver’s door lock will be programmed to passively  
unlock. The driver’s door will passively unlock when  
you approach the vehicle with the key fob transmitter  
slider switch set to ON.  
Alarm  
If you choose PASSIVE UNLOCK BOTH, the driver  
and passenger’s door locks will be programmed to  
passively unlock. The driver and passenger doors will  
passively unlock when you approach the vehicle with  
the key fob transmitter slider switch set to ON.  
Press the OPTIONS button until ALARM appears on  
the display, then use the RESET button to page through  
the following selections:  
ALARM-HORN  
ALARM HORN & LIGHTS  
See “Remote Function Actuation (RFA) System” in the  
Index for more information.  
If you choose ALARM-HORN, the horn will sound  
during an alarm.  
2-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Approach Lights  
If you choose AUTO LOCK ON, both doors will  
automatically lock when the vehicle exceeds 10 mph (16  
km/h) in a manual transmission. In a vehicle with an  
automatic transmission, both doors will automatically  
lock when you move the shifter out of PARK (P).  
Press the OPTIONS button until APPROACH LIGHTS  
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to  
page through the following choices:  
APPROACH LIGHTS ON  
APPROACH LIGHTS OFF  
Choose AUTO LOCK OFF to turn this option off.  
Auto Unlock  
If you choose APPROACH LIGHTS ON, the fog lamps,  
front turn signal, rear back-up and courtesy lamps will  
come on for 30 seconds when you press UNLOCK on  
the key fob transmitter. This will occur only when it is  
dark outside.  
The AUTO UNLOCK will be available only if AUTO  
LOCK is set to ON.  
Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO UNLOCK  
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to  
page through the following choices:  
APPROACH LIGHTS OFF turns off this option.  
AUTO UNLOCK DRIVER  
AUTO UNLOCK BOTH  
AUTO UNLOCK OFF  
See “Remote Function Actuation (RFA) System” in the  
Index for more information.  
Auto Lock  
Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO LOCK appears  
on the display, then use the RESET button to page  
through the following choices:  
If you choose AUTO UNLOCK DRIVER, the driver’s  
door will automatically unlock when you turn the  
vehicle off and pull the key out of the ignition.  
AUTO LOCK ON  
AUTO LOCK OFF  
Choose AUTO UNLOCK BOTH, and both doors will  
automatically unlock when you turn the vehicle off and  
pull the key out of the ignition.  
AUTO UNLOCK OFF turns off this option.  
2-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Easy Entry  
Blank Page  
The easy entry feature will only be available if the  
vehicle is equipped with the memory option.  
There is a blank page at the end of the OPTIONS menu.  
When the blank page is displayed, you can access the  
following items:  
Press the OPTIONS button until SEAT EASY ENTRY  
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to  
page through the following choices:  
FOB TRAINING: This option allows you to match the  
RFA transmitter(s) to your vehicle. You can access this  
option by pressing and holding RESET for three  
seconds while you are on the blank page at the end of  
the OPTIONS menu. The message FOB TRAINING  
will be displayed. See “Matching Transmitter(s) To Your  
Vehicle” in the Index for more information.  
SEAT EASY ENTRY ON  
SEAT EASY ENTRY OFF  
If you choose SEAT EASY ENTRY ON, when you turn the  
ignition off and remove the key, the seat will automatically  
move back and the telescopic steering wheel (if equipped)  
will return to its full-forward position for an easy exit or an  
easy entrance when returning to the vehicle.  
TIRE TRAINING: The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)  
operates with battery-powered sensors that are located  
inside the valve stems on each tire. Each sensor has a  
unique ID code so the vehicle knows the tire location of  
the sensor. When the vehicle reaches a speed of greater  
than 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensors begin to send the  
tire pressure readings to a receiver inside the vehicle.  
These readings are displayed when using the GAGES  
button on the DIC. If you are unable to display your tire  
pressures while the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph  
(24 km/h), you may need to have your sensor ID codes  
learned by the vehicle. See your dealer.  
SEAT EASY ENTRY OFF turns off this option.  
Languages  
You can select which language the DIC will display its  
messages. Press the OPTIONS button until the word  
LANGUAGES appears on the display, then use the  
RESET button to page through the following choices:  
LANGUAGE ENGLISH  
LANGUAGE FRENCH  
LANGUAGE GERMAN  
LANGUAGE SPANISH  
2-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
ACT HNDLING WARMING UP: When you first start  
DIC Warnings and Messages  
you vehicle (especially in during cold winter weather),  
and begin to drive away (up to 6 mph (10 km/h)), the  
message ACT HNDLING WARMING UP may be  
displayed in the DIC, the instrument cluster light will be  
on, and a chime will sound. This is normal. You can  
acknowledge this message by pressing the RESET  
button. The Active Handling system performance is  
affected until the next message WARM UP  
The following messages and warnings may appear in the  
DIC display. The DIC display area is located in the  
instrument cluster below the speedometer and  
tachometer, directly above the steering column.  
You may receive more than one message at a time.  
Messages will appear one behind the other. To  
acknowledge a message and remove it from the display,  
press RESET. You may scroll through the messages  
that may have been sent at the same time. The message  
center is continuously updated with the vehicle  
performance status.  
COMPLETE is displayed in the DIC.  
WARM UP COMPLETE : If you receive this message  
and hear a chime, the system has completed the  
functional check of the Active Handling System.  
ABS ACTIVE (Anti-Lock Brake System Active):  
When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure  
to help avoid a braking skid, the ABS ACTIVE message  
will be displayed.  
TRAC/ACT HNDLG - ON: If the Traction Control  
and Active Handling Systems are off, depressing the  
Active Handling System console button momentarily  
will turn both systems on. The message TRAC/ACT  
HNDLG - ON will be displayed temporarily in the DIC,  
the instrument cluster light will be off and a chime  
will sound.  
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is  
displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. The  
message will stay on for a few seconds after the system  
stops adjusting brake pressure.  
2-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
SERVICE ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System): If the  
TRAC/ACT HNDLG - OFF: By pressing the Active  
Handling System console button briefly, the driver can  
turn the Traction Control and Active Handling Systems  
off. The message TRAC/ACT HNDLG - OFF will be  
displayed in the DIC, the instrument cluster light will be  
on and a chime will sound. You can acknowledge this  
message by pressing the RESET button. The anti-lock  
brake systems remains on with the Traction Control and  
Active Handling Systems off. You should adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
SERVICE ABS message is displayed when you are  
driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition  
off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If  
the message stays on, or comes back on again while you  
are driving, your vehicle is in need of service. If the  
regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still  
have brakes, but don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the  
regular brake system light is also on, you don’t have  
anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with your  
brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in  
this section.  
COMPETITIVE DRIVING: When the Competitive  
Driving mode is selected, this message will be displayed  
in the DIC. The instrument cluster light will not be on  
when the Competitive Driving mode is selected. The  
Traction Control System will not be operating while in  
the Competitive Driving mode. You should adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed, your  
traction control system and the optional active handling  
system will also be disabled. The driver information  
center will scroll three messages: SERVICE ABS,  
SERVICE TRACTION SYS and SERVICE ACTIVE  
HNDLG, and the instrument cluster car icon will be  
illuminated. The driver can acknowledge these messages  
by pressing the reset button three times. When the  
service message is displayed the computer controlled  
systems will not assist the driver and you should have  
the system repaired as soon as possible. Adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
2-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
SERVICE COLUMN LOCK: If the system that  
controls the locking and unlocking of the steering  
column does not work properly, have the vehicle towed  
to a dealer for service.  
Low oil pressure may be the result of a combination of  
low oil level and abrupt changes in the vehicle’s  
direction. When this warning is displayed, you should  
not operate the engine at high RPM or make fast abrupt  
moves. When it is convenient, you should check the oil  
level. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.  
PULL KEY - WAIT 10 SEC: If this message comes  
on, the steering column lock system has detected a  
problem while engaging the steering column lock. This  
message may occur when the ignition key is removed  
and re-inserted before the steering column lock system  
fully locks or unlocks the steering column. To  
LOW OIL LEVEL: Press RESET to acknowledge that  
you have read the message and to remove it from the  
display. The message will reappear every 10 minutes  
until this condition changes.  
acknowledge that you have read this message, and to  
clear it from the display, remove the ignition key and  
wait 10 seconds before re-inserting the key into the  
ignition. If you attempt to operate your vehicle without  
removing the key for 10 seconds, the vehicle’s fuel  
system will shut off at 1.5 mph (2.4 km/h). If the  
message stays on after removing the key and waiting 10  
seconds, have your vehicle taken to an authorized dealer  
as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair.  
You will hear two chimes when this message is  
displayed. If this message appears after starting your  
engine, your engine oil level may be too low. You may  
need to add oil. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.  
REDUCED ENGINE POWER: You will hear  
chimes continuously when this message is displayed.  
To acknowledge that you have read the message and  
to remove it from the display, press RESET. The  
message will reappear every 15 seconds until this  
condition changes.  
LOW OIL PRESSURE: You will hear four chimes and  
the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this  
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,  
press the RESET button. After you press the RESET  
button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a  
chime every minute until the vehicle is serviced. If you  
do not press RESET, the message will remain on the  
digital display until the vehicle is serviced.  
2-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT: Press RESET to  
acknowledge that you have read the message and to  
remove it from the display. The message will reappear  
every 10 minutes until this condition changes. You will  
hear two chimes when this message is displayed.  
If the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays the  
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message and the  
CHECK ENGINE light comes on, a noticeable  
reduction in the vehicle’s performance may occur. If the  
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed but  
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your  
destination. The performance may be reduced the next  
time the vehicle is driven.  
If this message comes on while you are driving, you  
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.  
It could indicate that you have a loose or broken drive  
belt or another electrical problem. Have it checked  
right away. Driving while this light is on could drain  
your battery.  
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while the  
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,  
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime the  
CHECK ENGINE light stays on, the vehicle should be  
taken to an authorized Chevrolet dealer as soon as  
possible for diagnosis and repair.  
If you must drive a short distance with the message on,  
be certain to turn off your accessories, such as the radio  
and air conditioner.  
Also, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” (Check  
Engine Light) in the Index. If the REDUCED ENGINE  
POWER message is displayed in combination with the  
COOLANT OVER TEMP message, see “Engine  
Overheating” in the Index.  
TRACTION SYS ACTIVE: When your traction  
control system is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION  
SYS ACTIVE message will be displayed. Slippery road  
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so  
adjust your driving accordingly. The message will stay  
on for a few seconds after the traction control system  
stops limiting wheel spin.  
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON: If this message appears  
on the DIC, there may be an electrical or another system  
problem with your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked  
by your dealer if this message keeps appearing.  
TRACTION SYSTEM-ON: This message is displayed  
when you decide to turn on the Traction Control System  
by pressing the switch on the console. This message will  
shut off automatically on its own.  
2-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF: You will hear a single  
quick tone when this message is displayed. This  
message comes on and stays on when the Traction  
Control System button on the console is pressed to  
turn the system off. To acknowledge this message,  
press RESET.  
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL: This message is used  
to indicate to the driver that the Selective Real Time  
Damping (SRTD) system has detected a malfunction  
and that the system must be serviced. The SERVICE  
RIDE CONTROL message will always come on when a  
failure is detected by the Selective Real Time Damping  
(SRTD) system. If a fault is present in the SRTD  
which causes the shocks to be in their full soft condition,  
the SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS  
INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM 80 MPH (129 km/h)  
will display together. You will never get a SHOCKS  
INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH  
(129 km/h) message without a SERVICE RIDE  
CONTROL message.  
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM: If the SERVICE  
TRACTION SYS message is displayed when you are  
driving, there is a problem with your Traction Control  
System and your vehicle is in need of service. When this  
message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel  
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
If you have the optional Active Handling System, the  
SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message will also be  
displayed and the instrument cluster car icon will also be  
illuminated. The driver can acknowledge both messages  
by pressing the reset button two times which will also  
turn off the instrument cluster icon. When the service  
messages are displayed, the computer controlled  
systems will not assist the driver in controlling the  
vehicle. Have the system repaired as soon as possible.  
Adjust your driving accordingly.  
SHOCKS INOPERATIVE: You will hear four chimes  
when this message is displayed. To acknowledge that  
you have read the message and to remove it from the  
display, press RESET. The message will reappear every  
10 minutes until this condition changes.  
This message indicates that a malfunction is present in  
the Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD) system which  
is causing the shocks to be in their full soft mode.  
This is a warning to the driver that the vehicle handling  
may be affected. Have your vehicle serviced as soon  
as possible.  
2-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If the engine coolant exceeds 255 F (124 C), this  
message is displayed. If you have been operating your  
vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should  
pull off from the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the  
engine as soon as possible. You can monitor the coolant  
temperature with the GAGES button on the DIC or the  
engine coolant gage on the instrument panel cluster. See  
“Engine Overheating” in the Index.  
MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h): You will  
hear four chimes when this message is displayed. To  
acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press  
RESET, a message will reappear every 10 minutes until  
this condition changes.  
This message indicates that the vehicle speed will be  
limited to 80 mph (129 km/h) when the shock absorber  
system has failed and the shocks are in their full soft  
mode. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.  
HIGH OIL TEMPERATURE REDUCE ENGINE  
RPM: You will hear four chimes when this message is  
displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press the  
RESET button. After you press the RESET button, a  
message will be displayed and you will hear a chime  
every minute until this condition changes. If you do not  
press RESET, the message will remain on the digital  
display until the condition changes.  
LOW COOLANT: You will hear two chimes when this  
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,  
press RESET. After you press RESET, a message will  
reappear and you will hear a chime every 10 minutes  
until this condition changes.  
This message indicates that the coolant in the system is  
low. You may need to add coolant. See “Engine  
Overheating” in the Index.  
If the engine oil temperature exceeds 320 F (160 C),  
this message is displayed. You should check the engine  
coolant temperature and engine oil level. If your engine  
is too hot, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. Your  
vehicle may need service, so see your dealer. You can  
monitor the oil temperature with the GAGES button on  
the DIC.  
COOLANT OVER TEMP: You will hear four chimes  
and the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this  
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,  
press the RESET button. After you press the RESET  
button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a  
chime every minute until this condition changes. If you  
do not press RESET, the message will remain on the  
digital display until the condition changes.  
2-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
HIGH TRANS TEMP (Automatic Transmission  
Only): You will hear four chimes when this message  
is displayed. To acknowledge this warning, press the  
RESET button. After you press the RESET button,  
the message will be displayed every 10 minutes until the  
condition changes. If you do not press RESET,  
the message remains on the display until the  
condition changes.  
If the HIGH TRANS TEMP message is displayed  
during normal vehicle operation on flat roads,  
your vehicle may need service. See your dealer for  
an inspection.  
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING: If the SERVICE  
ACTIVE HNDLG message is displayed, there is a  
problem with your Active Handling System and your  
vehicle needs service. The instrument cluster light will  
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above  
270 F (132 C) or rises rapidly, this message is  
also be on and a chime will sound. When this message is  
displayed, the system is not working. Adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
displayed. The transmission may shift gears or apply the  
torque converter clutch to reduce the fluid temperature.  
Driving aggressively or driving on long hills can cause  
the transmission fluid temperature to be higher than  
normal. If this message appears, you may continue to  
drive at a slower speed. You should also monitor the  
transmission fluid temperature and allow it to cool to at  
least 230 F (110 C). The transmission fluid temperature  
can be monitored with the GAGES button on the DIC.  
See “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index.  
You should also check the engine coolant temperature.  
If it is also hot, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.  
ACTIVE HANDLING: Your vehicle is equipped with  
an optional computer controlled system to assist the  
driver in controlling the vehicle in difficult driving  
conditions. You may feel or hear the system working  
and see the ACTIVE HANDLING message displayed in  
the DIC. This is normal when the system is operating.  
2-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
LOW TIRE PRESSURE: You will hear two chimes  
when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the  
warning, press RESET. After you press RESET, a  
message will reappear and you will hear a chime every  
10 minutes until this condition changes. This message  
indicates that the pressure in one of your tires is less  
than 25 psi (172 kPa). Next to the LOW TIRE  
PRESSURE message, you can see either LF (left front),  
LR (left rear), RF (right front) or RR (right rear) to  
indicate to you which tire is low on pressure. You can  
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.  
To read other messages that may have been sent at the  
same time, press RESET. If a tire pressure message  
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the  
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your  
Tire Loading Information Label. See “Extended  
Mobility Tires” in the Index.  
CAUTION:  
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT  
TIRE message is displayed on the Driver  
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling  
capabilities will be reduced during severe  
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose  
control of your vehicle. You or others could be  
injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when  
the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE  
message is displayed. Drive cautiously, and check  
your tire pressures as soon as you can.  
2-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
FLAT TIRE: You will hear two chimes when this  
message is displayed followed by the message MAX  
SPEED 55 MPH (90 km/h). If this message appears, do  
not drive your vehicle above these limits. The next  
message to appear is REDUCED HANDLING. Adjust  
your driving accordingly. To acknowledge these  
warnings, press RESET. After you press RESET, a  
message will reappear and you will hear a chime every  
10 minutes until this condition changes. This message  
indicates that the pressure in one of your tires is lower  
than 5 psi (34 kPa). Next to the FLAT TIRE message,  
you can see either LF (left front), LR (left rear), RF  
(right front) or RR (right rear) to indicate to you which  
tire is flat. You can receive more than one tire pressure  
message at a time. To read other messages that may  
have been sent at the same time, press RESET. If a tire  
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as  
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those  
shown on your Tire Loading Information Label. See  
“Extended Mobility Tires” and “Tire Inflation” in  
the Index.  
CAUTION:  
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT  
TIRE message is displayed on the Driver  
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling  
capabilities will be reduced during severe  
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose  
control of your vehicle. You or others could be  
injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when  
the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE  
message is displayed. Drive cautiously, and check  
your tire pressures as soon as you can.  
2-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE - (LF, LR, RF, RR): You  
will hear two chimes when this message is displayed. To  
acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press  
RESET, a message will reappear and you will hear a  
chime every 10 minutes until this condition changes.  
This message indicates that the pressure in one of your  
tires is higher than 42 psi (290 kPa). Next to the HIGH  
TIRE PRESSURE message, you can see either LF  
(left front), LR (left rear), RF (right front) or RR (right  
rear) to indicate to you which tire is higher than 42 psi  
(290 kPa). You can receive more than one tire pressure  
message at a time. To read other messages that may  
have been sent at the same time, press RESET. If a tire  
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as  
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those  
shown on your Tire Loading Information Label.  
See “Extended Mobility Tires” and “Tire Inflation”  
in the Index.  
SERVICE TIRE MON SYS: If this message comes on,  
a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is not  
working properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of  
the four sensors are missing or inoperable, the warning  
will come on in approximately 10 minutes. If all four  
sensors are missing, the warning will come on in  
approximately 15 to 20 minutes. (All the sensors would  
be missing, for example, if you put different wheels on  
your vehicle without transferring the sensors.) If the  
warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem  
with the TPM. See your dealer.  
2-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE ENGINE RPM  
Other Messages  
TRUNK AJAR (Convertible/Hardtop)  
HATCH AJAR (Coupe)  
Here are more messages that you can receive on your  
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a  
message and read another message that may have come  
on at the same time, press the RESET button.  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
LOW BRAKE FLUID (See “Brake Fluid” in  
the Index.)  
BRAKE BEFORE SHIFT (Automatic  
Transmissions Only)  
LOW FUEL (See “Fuel Gage” in the Index.)  
LOW VOLTAGE  
CHANGE OIL NOW (See “Engine Oil Life” in  
the Index.)  
CHANGE OIL SOON (See “Engine Oil Life” in  
the Index.)  
LOW WASHER FLUID  
RESERVE FUEL  
CRUISE DISENGAGED (See “Cruise Control” in  
the Index.)  
UPSHIFT NOW  
CRUISE SET __ MPH (__ km/h) (See “Cruise  
Control” in the Index.)  
DOOR AJAR  
2-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems  
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be  
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.  
3-2  
Comfort Controls  
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and  
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)  
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)  
Theft-Deterrent Feature  
Manual Comfort Controls  
Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control  
System (If Equipped)  
Sensors  
Air Conditioning  
3-29  
3-31  
3-31  
3-31  
Understanding Radio Reception  
Tips About Your Audio System  
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player  
Care of Your Compact Discs  
3-11  
3-11  
3-13  
Heating  
Defogging and Defrosting  
Rear Window Defogger  
Audio Systems  
Setting the Clock All Systems  
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and  
Automatic Tone Control  
Care of Your Compact Disc Player  
Fixed Mast Antenna  
Power Mast Antenna Care (If Equipped)  
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window  
Antennas (If Equipped)  
3-  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Fan Knob  
Comfort Controls  
The left knob is the fan knob and controls the force of  
air you want. Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan  
speed or counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. The  
fan must be turned on for the air conditioning  
compressor to operate.  
This section tells you how to make your air system work  
for you. Your comfort control system uses  
ozone-friendly R-134a refrigerant.  
With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling  
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a  
flow-through ventilation system described later in  
this section.  
Temperature Knob  
The center knob controls the temperature of the air  
coming through the system. Turn it counterclockwise  
(toward the blue area) for cooler air. Turn it clockwise  
(toward the red area) for warmer air.  
Manual Comfort Controls  
Mode Knob  
The right knob selects the direction of where the air will  
enter the vehicle.  
UPPER: This setting directs most of the air through  
the instrument panel outlets with a very small amount of  
air directed to the lower outlets.  
BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air into the  
vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your  
upper body through the instrument panel outlets, while  
warmer air is directed through the lower outlets.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
RECIRCULATE: Press this button to limit the  
amount of fresh air entering the vehicle by recirculating  
most of the air inside the vehicle. The light on the button  
will come on when operating. This setting is helpful  
when you are trying to cool the air quickly or to limit  
odors entering the vehicle. RECIRCULATE cannot be  
used while in the DEFROST or DEFOG modes.  
LOWER: This setting directs most of the air  
through the lower ducts to the floor area of the vehicle  
with some of the air also directed toward the windshield  
and side window vents.  
DEFOG: This setting divides the air between the  
windshield and lower outlets with a small amount  
directed toward the side window vents. This is useful  
when fog appears on the windshield or side glass due to  
rain or snowy conditions.  
A/C: This button turns the air conditioning  
compressor off or on under most conditions. The light  
on the A/C button comes on when the compressor is  
operating. The air conditioning does not operate at  
temperatures below approximately 35 F to 40 F  
(2 C to 4 C). The air conditioning cools and  
dehumidifies the air coming into the vehicle. The air  
conditioning cannot be turned off in DEFROST, as it  
helps to remove moisture from the vehicle. It also helps  
to keep the windows clear.  
DEFROST: Use this setting to quickly remove fog  
or frost from the windshield. This setting directs most of  
the airflow to the windshield with a small amount  
directed toward the lower and side window outlets.  
Mode Buttons  
These buttons control the air intake, the air conditioning  
and the rear window defogger operation.  
The air conditioning may be forced off at high engine  
speeds or high engine oil or coolant temperatures.  
FRESH AIR: Press this button and it will bring  
outside air into the vehicle. The light on the button will  
come on when operating. Use this setting while trying to  
defrost or defog windows to help clear moisture.  
See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this section for  
more information.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Digital Display  
Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control  
System (If Equipped)  
The digital display shows readings in Fahrenheit or  
Celsius by pressing the E/M button (English/Metric) on  
the Driver Information Center (DIC). When you start  
the vehicle, the display will show the current fan speed,  
air delivery mode and the driver-set temperature for  
approximately five seconds and then show the  
outside temperature.  
When the system is fully in the automatic mode, the  
word AUTO will also appear on the display. If you have  
selected a manual fan speed, then the fan symbol will  
appear on the display. If a manual air delivery mode has  
been selected, the delivery mode symbol will appear on  
the display.  
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Automatic  
Electronic Dual Climate Control System. This system  
can automatically adjust and control temperature output,  
fan speed, air delivery mode, air conditioning operation  
and air intake. You can use the AUTO (automatic)  
setting or override the automatic operation with  
manual control settings. The control settings will be  
remembered each time you turn the ignition off  
and restart in the same settings. You can use the  
memory option to store and recall your settings.  
(See “Memory” in the Index.)  
Driver Set Temperature Knob  
The DRIVER knob changes the temperature on the  
driver’s and passenger’s side of the vehicle. Turn the  
knob clockwise to increase the temperature and  
counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.  
Whenever you turn this knob, the temperature will be  
displayed for approximately five seconds along with the  
current fan speed and air delivery mode.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
When adjusting the temperature, start with a driver-set  
temperature of 73 F (23 C) until you determine your  
comfort zone. If you choose 60 F (16 C), the  
Automatic Operation  
Press the AUTO button to place the entire system in the  
automatic mode. After a five-second display of the  
current settings, only the word AUTO and the outside  
temperature will be shown on the digital display. The  
system will operate to achieve your comfort set  
temperature as quickly as possible. If you have set the  
driver temperature at 60 F (16 C) or 90 F (32 C),  
the system will not operate automatically until a  
different temperature is selected. The AUTO control  
system works best with the windows up and the  
removable roof installed or the convertible top up.  
system will remain at maximum cooling and will not  
automatically adjust fan speed or air delivery. If you  
choose 90 F (32 C), the system will remain at  
maximum heating and will not automatically adjust fan  
speed or air delivery. Choosing either maximum setting  
will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.  
Turning the knob past either maximum setting has no  
effect on the operation of the system.  
Passenger Temperature Offset  
A Typical Cold Weather Example:  
The PASSENGER knob changes the temperature on the  
passenger’s side of the vehicle. When the knob is in the  
12 o’clock position, the passenger’s temperature is the  
same as the driver’s. Turn the knob clockwise for  
warmer air on the passenger’s side, counterclockwise for  
cooler air. If the driver-set temperature is set at 60 F  
(16 C) or 90 F (32 C), turning the passenger knob  
has no effect because the system is locked at a  
maximum setting.  
Your vehicle has been parked outside overnight in cold  
weather (below 32 F/ 0 C) and you have set the driver  
temperature at 73 F (23 C) and have selected the  
AUTO mode. The system will automatically adjust the  
temperature output to maximum heating. The fan will  
start at a low speed. This is to avoid blowing cold air  
into the vehicle. The length of the delay depends on the  
amount of time since the engine was last started, the  
outside temperature and the engine coolant temperature.  
As the coolant warms up, the fan speed will gradually  
increase. Air will flow to the floor with some air to  
the windshield to prevent fogging under most  
normal conditions.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
As the interior of the vehicle warms up to your comfort  
set temperature, the fan speed will decrease and the  
temperature output may become cooler. If the interior  
temperature continues to warm up due to heating  
from the sun or outside temperature increases, the  
system may switch to other air delivery modes  
(typically DEFOG or BI-LEVEL).  
The air intake may start in the recirculated mode for  
maximum cooling performance. As the interior of the  
vehicle cools down to your comfort set temperature, the  
fan speed will decrease and the temperature output may  
become warmer. The air intake may shift from  
recirculation to fresh air mode. If the interior continues  
to cool due to a decrease in the amount of heat the  
vehicle is absorbing from the sun or a decrease in the  
outside temperature, the system could switch to other air  
delivery modes (typically BI-LEVEL or DEFOG).  
A Typical Hot Weather Example:  
The vehicle has been parked outside all day in hot  
weather (above 70 F/ 21 C) and you have set the driver  
temperature at 73 F (23 C) and have selected the  
AUTO mode. The system will automatically adjust the  
temperature output to maximum cooling. The blower  
will start at a low speed momentarily to push the hot air  
to the floor of the vehicle and then go to a higher blower  
speed with cold airflow out of the instrument panel  
outlets. A small amount of airflow will continue through  
the lower ducts to cool the floor area.  
Manual Settings  
With the Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control  
System, there are several manual settings you can use to  
control the system and override the AUTO operation.  
You can program the fan speed, air delivery mode, air  
intake mode and control the air conditioning operation  
using these settings. The system will still determine the  
temperature output level based on the driver-set  
temperature and the passenger temperature offset.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
LOWER: This setting directs most of the air to the  
floor area and some of it toward the windshield and side  
window vents.  
FAN SPEED: Press the button with the fan symbol  
on it to manually lock in the current fan speed and to  
stop the automatic fan speed control. Pressing the  
arrows will delete AUTO from the digital display. The  
fan graphics with the fan speed bars will be shown. To  
increase the fan speed so that more air flows into the  
vehicle, press the UP arrow on the fan switch. To  
decrease the fan speed and airflow, press the DOWN  
arrow. The AUTO button must be pressed to return to  
the automatic fan control.  
DEFOG: This setting divides the air between  
the windshield and lower outlets and a small amount  
toward the side window vents. This is useful when fog  
appears on the windshield or side glass due to rain or  
snowy conditions.  
Mode Buttons  
MODE: Press the MODE button to manually lock in the  
current air delivery setting and to stop the automatic  
mode control. Pressing the MODE button will delete  
AUTO from the digital display and the mode graphics  
will be shown. To change the setting, press the MODE  
button again. The AUTO button must be pressed to  
return to the automatic mode selection.  
These buttons control climate control ON/OFF, air  
intake, front defrost, rear defrost and the air  
conditioning operation.  
OFF: Press the OFF button to turn off the climate  
control system. This is the only setting that fully shuts  
off the fan. The digital display will show only the  
outside temperature. You can still adjust the driver set  
temperature, the passenger temperature offset and the air  
intake mode while in OFF.  
UPPER: This setting directs most of the air through  
the instrument panel outlets and a very small amount to  
the lower outlets.  
BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air into the  
vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your  
upper body through the instrument panel outlets, while  
warmer air is directed through the lower outlets.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
RECIRCULATE: Press this button to limit the  
amount of fresh air entering the vehicle. The light on  
this air intake button will come on to show when it is  
A/C: This button turns the air conditioning  
compressor on or off, except in the FRONT defrost  
mode. The light on the A/C button will come on when  
the compressor is operating in either the automatic or  
manual mode. The air conditioning may also be forced  
off at high engine speeds. The light on the A/C button  
will flash if pressed when air conditioning operation is  
not allowed.  
operating. Recirculate is helpful when you are trying to  
cool the air quickly or trying to limit odors and dust  
from entering the vehicle. When in the AUTO mode, the  
system automatically selects recirculate to cool the  
vehicle’s temperature. By pressing this button, the  
system will lock into the recirculated air mode. Any  
adjustment to the air intake must then be made  
manually. The recirculated air mode is not allowed in  
the front defrost or defog modes as fresh air helps  
reduce moisture inside the vehicle.  
FRESH AIR: Press this button to provide fresh  
air from the outside. The light on this air intake button  
will come on to show when it is operating. When in the  
AUTO mode, the system automatically selects FRESH  
AIR instead of recirculate, as required, to control the  
temperature in the vehicle. By pressing FRESH AIR, the  
system will lock into the fresh air mode. Any adjustment  
to the air intake must then be made manually. FRESH  
AIR should be used when trying to defrost or defog  
windows to help reduce moisture inside the vehicle.  
FRONT: Press the FRONT defrost button to  
quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. This  
setting directs most of the airflow to the windshield and  
a small amount toward the lower and side window  
outlets. The light on the button will come on and the  
digital display will show the defrost mode symbol and  
fan speed when the front defrost mode is being used.  
Pressing FRONT defrost again will return the system to  
the last operating mode.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If the system is in FRONT defrost when you shut the  
engine off, it will restart in FRONT defrost unless the  
engine is off for longer than 40 minutes. If the engine is  
off longer than 40 minutes, the system will restart in the  
operating mode you had set prior to FRONT defrost.  
Sensors  
The Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control  
System uses several sensors to control operation and  
display information.  
Solar Load Sensor  
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies air coming  
into the vehicle. It also operates in defrost to help  
remove moisture from the vehicle. The air conditioning  
does not operate at temperatures below approximately  
35 F to 40 F (2 C to 4 C). If the system is operating in  
the AUTO mode, turning the air conditioning off will  
delete AUTO from the digital display and show current  
mode and fan settings. The AUTO button must be  
pressed to return to the automatic mode operation.  
This sensor is located on the top right side of the  
defroster grille. The defroster grille is on the top of the  
instrument panel.  
The sensor monitors the sun’s solar radiation and uses  
this information as part of the automatic climate control  
system when operating in the AUTO mode.  
Be careful not to put anything over the sensor. When  
covered, the sensor cannot compensate for changes in  
the amount of heat the vehicle is absorbing from the sun.  
See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this section for  
more information.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Outside Air Temperature Sensor  
Inside Temperature Sensor  
This sensor is located in the air intake under the front  
bumper of the vehicle. Information from this sensor  
is used for the outside air temperature readings shown  
on the digital display for the automatic climate  
control system.  
This sensor is located to the left of the ignition switch.  
The automatic climate control system uses this sensor to  
receive information, so if you block or cover it, the  
system will not function properly.  
Air Conditioning  
If the outside temperature goes up, the displayed  
temperature will not change until:  
On very hot days, the vehicle will cool down more  
quickly and economically if you open the windows long  
enough to let hot inside air escape. Then keep the  
windows closed in order to allow the air conditioning to  
work best. Maximum cooling will occur when the  
recirculate setting is operating, airflow direction is in the  
upper mode, and the temperature control knob  
(on a manual climate control system) is turned all the  
way to the blue area. These settings will be selected  
by the Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control  
System if operating in AUTO when maximum cooling  
is required.  
The vehicle’s speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) for  
one and a half minutes.  
The vehicle’s speed is above 45 mph (72 km/h) for  
one minute.  
These delays help prevent false readings. If the  
temperature goes down, the outside temperature display  
is updated immediately.  
If the vehicle has been turned off for more than three  
hours, the current outside temperature will be shown  
when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for  
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled  
from the previous vehicle operation.  
When the air conditioning is on, you may sometimes  
notice slight changes in the vehicle’s engine  
performance and power. This is normal. The system is  
designed to help fuel economy while maintaining the  
desired cooling level.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The air conditioning removes moisture from the air, so  
you may notice water dripping from under the vehicle  
when it is idling or after it has been turned off.  
This is normal.  
Defogging and Defrosting  
To rapidly defrost the windshield, the FRONT defrost  
mode (Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control  
System) or defrost mode (manual control system)  
should be used and the fan speed should be adjusted to  
the highest speed. With the manual control system, turn  
the temperature control knob all the way to the red area.  
Heating  
The heater works best if you keep the windows closed.  
Maximum heating will occur when airflow direction is  
in the lower mode and the temperature control knob  
(on a manual climate control system) is all the way in  
the red area. These settings will be selected by the  
Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control System if  
operating in AUTO when maximum heating is required.  
To keep the windshield clear and provide heated air to  
the floor area of the vehicle, use the DEFOG setting.  
Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger  
vents located near the side rearview mirrors.  
Rear Window Defogger  
The BI-LEVEL setting is designed for use on sunny  
days when the air is only moderately warm or cool.  
On days like these, the sun may adequately warm your  
upper body, but your lower body may not be warm  
enough. The BI-LEVEL setting will direct cooler  
airflow to your upper body and warmer air to the  
floor area.  
REAR: This button turns the rear defogger and the  
optional heated outside mirrors on. The light on the  
button will come on when operating. The system  
automatically shuts off after approximately 10 minutes.  
If further defogging is desired, press the button again  
and it will operate for about five more minutes.  
If you have the optional engine coolant heater and use it  
during cold weather 0 F (-18 C) or lower, the heating  
system will provide heat more quickly because the  
coolant is already warmed. See “Engine Coolant Heater”  
in the Index.  
The rear window defogger operates only when the  
engine is running.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  
remove fog from the rear window. Do not attach  
anything like a temporary vehicle license or a decal  
across the defogger grid on the rear window.  
Ventilation Tips  
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or  
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater  
and defroster will work far better, reducing the  
chance of fogging the inside of the windows.  
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the  
blower fan to the highest speed for a few moments  
before driving off. This helps clear the intake outlets  
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of  
fogging the inside of the windows.  
NOTICE:  
Don’t use a razor blade or something sharp on  
the inside of the rear window. If you do, you  
could cut or damage the warming grid, and  
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.  
Keep the area around the base of the center  
instrument panel console and air path under the seats  
clear of objects. This helps air circulate throughout  
the vehicle.  
Ventilation System  
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies  
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside  
air will also enter the vehicle when the fan is running.  
Audio Systems  
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed  
to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.  
You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint  
yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco  
Electronics system can do and how to operate all its  
controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the  
advanced engineering that went into it.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Playing the Radio  
Setting the Clock for All Systems  
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and  
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn  
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is  
capable of rotating continuously.  
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears.  
Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears.  
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player  
and Automatic Tone Control  
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being  
played. If you press the button when the ignition is off,  
the clock will show for a few seconds.  
SCV: Your system has a feature called  
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,  
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up  
for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume  
at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the  
upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you  
drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as  
necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed.  
The volume level should always sound the same to you  
as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the  
control all the way down. Each notch on the control  
ring allows for more volume compensation at faster  
vehicle speeds.  
Your vehicle may be equipped with six Bose amplified  
speakers. See your dealer for details.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Finding a Station  
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let  
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to  
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:  
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1  
and FM2. The display shows your selection.  
1. Turn the radio on.  
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to  
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored  
position when you’re not using it.  
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.  
3. Tune in the desired station.  
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the  
next higher or lower station. The sound will mute  
while seeking.  
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that  
best suits the type of station selected.  
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.  
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the  
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,  
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,  
and SCAN will appear in the display. Use SCAN to  
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to  
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next  
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound  
will mute while scanning.  
the station you set will return and the AUTO TONE  
equalization that you selected will also be  
automatically selected for that button.  
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your  
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few  
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations  
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with  
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for  
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press  
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop  
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner  
is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1-P6)  
will appear momentarily just before the frequency is  
displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through  
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and FM1 or FM2  
will appear on the display.  
you’re not using them.  
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose  
preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for  
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz  
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first  
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another  
setting will appear on the display. Press it again after  
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go  
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB  
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,  
control will return to them and the AUTO TONE display  
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS and AUTO TONE  
button to program AUTO TONE for station presets.  
Setting the Tone  
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the  
knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to  
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s  
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the  
AUTO TONE display will go blank.  
Adjusting the Speakers  
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.  
Turn the knob clockwise for the right speakers and  
counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle  
position balances the sound between the speakers.  
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the  
knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise  
to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s  
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the  
AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak  
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.  
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the  
knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers  
and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle  
position balances the sound between the speakers.  
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  
you’re not using them.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Playing a Cassette Tape  
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow  
to go to the previous selection on the tape if the current  
selection has been playing for less than eight seconds.  
If the PREV button is pressed and the current selection  
has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go  
to the beginning of the current selection. Your tape must  
have at least three seconds of silence between each  
selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction  
arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. The  
sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation.  
Press this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to  
return to normal play.  
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are  
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer  
than that are so thin they may not work well in this  
player. If a tape is inserted when the ignition is on but  
the radio is off, the tape will begin playing. A tape  
symbol is shown in the center of the graphic display  
whenever a tape is inserted. When a tape is active, the  
tape symbol will be accompanied by a direction arrow.  
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,  
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do  
for the radio. Other controls may have different  
functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show  
the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side of the  
tape is playing.  
PROG (2): Press this button to play the other side of  
the tape.  
NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow  
to go to the next selection on the tape. If you hold the  
button or press it more than once, the player will  
continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape  
must have at least three seconds of silence between  
each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape  
direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation.  
The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation.  
Press this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to  
return to normal play.  
If you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound, it may  
not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and  
start over.  
The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and  
will eject the tape. The radio will go back to playing the  
last station selected.  
The player automatically senses the cassette for metal or  
CrO and sets the pre-emphasis. Anytime a tape is  
2
inserted, the top side is selected to play first.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
TAPE AUX: Press this button to change to the tape  
function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an  
arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.  
If your system is equipped with a remote playback  
device, pressing this button a second time will allow the  
remote device to play.  
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.  
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will  
play the last selected station while the tape reverses.  
(5): Press this button to reduce background  
noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear on  
the display.  
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio  
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the  
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the  
radio off if this button is pressed first. If you leave a  
cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it  
may become warm.  
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license  
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby  
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to  
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return  
to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected  
station while the tape advances.  
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the  
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play  
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to  
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of  
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean  
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to  
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to  
show the indicator was reset.  
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape  
is in the player.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
CD Adapter Kits  
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player  
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)  
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette  
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your  
tape player.  
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:  
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC.  
2. Turn the radio off.  
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five  
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash  
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.  
4. Insert the adapter. It will power up the radio and  
begin playing.  
Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc  
Player and Automatic Tone Control, are six Bose  
amplified speakers. See your dealer for details.  
This override routine will remain active until EJECT  
is pressed.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Playing the Radio  
Finding a Station  
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and  
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn  
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is  
capable of rotating continuously.  
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1  
and FM2. The display shows your selection.  
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to  
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored  
position when you’re not using it.  
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being  
played. If you press the button when the ignition is off,  
the clock will show for a few seconds.  
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the  
next higher or lower station. The sound will mute  
while seeking.  
SCV: Your system has a feature called  
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your  
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road  
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the  
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper  
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,  
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,  
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume  
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.  
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the  
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for  
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.  
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,  
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to  
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to  
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next  
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound  
will mute while scanning.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let  
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to  
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:  
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your  
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few  
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations  
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with  
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for  
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press  
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop  
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner  
is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1-P6)  
will appear momentarily just before the frequency is  
displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through  
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and FM1 or FM2 will  
appear on the display.  
1. Turn the radio on.  
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.  
3. Tune in the desired station.  
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that  
best suits the type of station selected.  
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.  
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the  
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,  
the station you set will return and the AUTO TONE  
equalization that you selected will also be  
Setting the Tone  
automatically selected for that button.  
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the  
knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to  
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s  
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the  
AUTO TONE display will go blank.  
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the  
knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise  
to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s  
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the  
AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak  
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.  
Adjusting the Speakers  
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.  
Turn the knob clockwise for the right speakers and  
counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle  
position balances the sound between the speakers.  
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the  
knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers  
and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle  
position balances the sound between the speakers.  
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  
you’re not using them.  
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose  
preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for  
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz  
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first  
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another  
setting will appear on the display. Press it again after  
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go  
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB  
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,  
control will return to them and the AUTO TONE  
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS and  
AUTO TONE button to program AUTO TONE for  
station presets.  
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  
you’re not using them.  
Playing a Compact Disc  
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The  
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. The  
display will show CD and the CD symbol. If you want  
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press  
RECALL or EJECT.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,  
the disc may not play and ERR (error) may appear on  
the display. Press RECALL to take ERR off the display.  
When things get back to normal, the disc should play.  
If the disc comes out, it could be that:  
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse  
within a track. Release it to play the passage. You can  
use the counter reading on the display to locate a  
passage easily.  
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly  
within a track. Release it to resume playing. You can  
use the counter reading on the display to locate a  
passage easily.  
The disc is upside down.  
It is dirty, scratched or wet.  
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and  
try again.)  
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is  
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how  
long it has been playing (elapsed time). The track  
number also appears when you change the volume or  
when a new track starts to play.  
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to  
go to the previous track if the current selection has been  
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button  
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for  
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of  
the current selection. If you hold the button or press it  
more than once, the player will continue moving back  
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.  
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc  
is in the player. The letters CD will go off the display.  
CD AUX: Press this button to change to the disc  
function when the radio is on. A CD icon will appear on  
the display when the disc is in the player, whether it is  
active or not. If your system is equipped with a remote  
playback device, pressing this button a second time will  
allow the remote device to play.  
RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,  
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will show on  
the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.  
RDM is reset to off when the disc is ejected.  
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio  
will play. The disc will start at the first track when you  
reinsert it.  
NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to  
go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it  
more than once, the player will continue moving forward  
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the  
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the  
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it was  
stopped. If you press EJECT but don’t remove the disc,  
the player will pull the disc back in to protect it after  
about one minute. If you leave a compact disc in the  
player while listening to the radio, it may become warm.  
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trunk-mounted  
CD changer. It is located in the rear center storage  
compartment. See “Rear Storage Compartments” in the  
Index for more information.  
With the optional compact disc changer, you can play up  
to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played  
using the trays supplied in the magazine. The small discs  
(8 cm) can be played only with specially designed trays.  
You must first load the magazine with discs before you  
can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one  
disc. Press the button on the back of the magazine and  
pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from  
bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down.  
If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play  
and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into  
the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading up  
to 12 discs in the magazine.  
NOTICE:  
Heavy objects in the center storage area which may  
shift or slide while driving could damage your CD  
changer. Protect your CD changer by not placing  
heavy, moveable objects in the center storage area.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide  
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push  
the magazine into the changer in the direction of the  
arrow marked on top of the magazine.  
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. If the  
door is left partially open, the changer will not operate  
and an error will occur. When the door is closed, the  
changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine.  
This will continue for up to two minutes depending on  
the number of discs loaded.  
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD  
changer door all the way open. The magazine will  
automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed  
whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting  
inside the changer.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly  
Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the  
changer, the CD symbol will appear on the radio display.  
If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the  
CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is  
ready to play. When a CD begins playing, a disc and  
track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are  
listed on the front of the magazine.  
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.  
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly  
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.  
SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next  
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for  
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute  
while seeking.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with  
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control, the  
following buttons are used for the trunk-mounted  
CD changer except the EJECT button for ejecting the  
CD magazine.  
P.SCAN: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,  
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on  
the display. Press P.SCAN again to turn off random play.  
TAPE AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded  
in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a  
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when  
a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch  
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.  
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to  
go to the previous track if the current selection has been  
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button  
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for  
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of  
the current selection. If you hold or press this button  
more than once, the player will continue moving back  
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.  
To eject the disc holder in the trunk-mounted CD  
changer, slide the CD changer door all the way open and  
the disc holder will automatically eject.  
PROG (2): Press this button to select a disc. The disc  
number and track number will be displayed.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with  
CD Player and Automatic Tone Control, the following  
buttons are used for the trunk-mounted CD changer  
except the EJECT button for ejecting the CD magazine.  
NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to  
go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it  
more than once, the player will continue moving forward  
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
CD AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded in  
the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a compact  
disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a  
compact disc is playing. Press CD AUX to switch  
between the trunk-mounted CD changer and compact  
disc if both are loaded.  
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to  
go to the previous track if the current selection has been  
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button  
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for  
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of  
the current selection. If you hold or press this button  
more than once, the player will continue moving back  
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.  
To eject the disc holder in the trunk-mounted CD  
changer, slide the CD changer door all the way open and  
the disc holder will automatically eject.  
RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,  
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on  
the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.  
Compact Disc Changer Errors  
If an error occurs while trying to play a CD in the  
compact disc changer, the following conditions may  
have caused the error:  
NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to  
go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it  
more than once, the player will continue moving forward  
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.  
The road is too rough. The disc should play when the  
road is smoother.  
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly  
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.  
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label side up.  
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and  
try again.)  
(5): Press this button to select a disc. The disc number  
and track number will be displayed.  
The CD changer door is open. Completely close the  
changer door to restore normal operation.  
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly  
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.  
An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.  
Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of  
the trays.  
SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next  
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for  
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute  
while seeking.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be  
corrected, please contact your dealer.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from  
Theft-Deterrent Feature  
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your  
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio  
functions whenever battery power is removed.  
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from  
the vehicle.  
2. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON.  
3. Turn the radio off.  
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or  
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the  
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is  
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.  
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down  
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the  
secret code number which you have written down.  
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display  
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery  
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power  
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret  
code before it will operate.  
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.  
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree  
with your code.  
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree  
with your code.  
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature  
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the  
code matches the secret code you have written down.  
The display will show REP to let you know that you  
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your  
secret code.  
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your  
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is  
recommended that you read through all nine steps  
before starting the procedure.  
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse  
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to  
time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.  
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show  
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The  
LED indicator by the volume control will begin  
flashing when the ignition is turned off.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a  
Power Loss  
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON.  
2. Turn the radio off.  
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than  
15 seconds between steps:  
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down  
until SEC shows on the display.  
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.  
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.  
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.  
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree  
with your code.  
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree  
with your code.  
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree  
with your code.  
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree  
with your code.  
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the  
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the  
code matches the secret code you have written down.  
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is  
now operable and secure.  
code matches the secret code you have written down.  
The display will show ---, indicating that the radio is  
no longer secured.  
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the  
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct  
code is entered.  
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will  
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour  
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you  
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the  
correct code before INOP appears.  
When battery power is removed and later applied to a  
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will  
appear on the display.  
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.  
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the  
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in  
this section.  
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature  
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than  
15 seconds between steps:  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:  
Understanding Radio Reception  
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.  
AM  
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably  
and clearly.  
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,  
especially at night. The longer range, however, can  
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick  
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try  
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.  
NOTICE:  
Before you add any sound equipment to your  
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile  
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can  
add what you want. If you can, it’s very  
important to do it properly. Added sound  
equipment may interfere with the operation of  
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or  
other systems, and even damage them. Your  
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the  
operation of sound equipment that has been  
added improperly.  
FM Stereo  
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals  
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall  
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing  
the sound to come and go.  
Tips About Your Audio System  
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable  
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher  
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud  
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by  
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe  
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.  
So, before adding sound equipment, check with  
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules  
covering mobile radio and telephone units.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning  
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because  
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature  
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.  
To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected,  
use the following steps.  
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player  
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause  
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged  
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their  
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and  
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate  
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.  
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC.  
2. Turn the radio off.  
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every  
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate  
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without  
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on  
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be  
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as  
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and  
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a  
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape  
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement  
in sound quality, clean the tape player.  
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five  
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash  
for two seconds.  
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.  
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s  
recommended cleaning time.  
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape  
detection feature is active again.  
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type  
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean  
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not  
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may  
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.  
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning  
cassette is not recommended.  
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette  
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,  
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub  
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.  
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through  
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for  
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will  
display --- to show the indicator was reset.  
Fixed Mast Antenna  
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes  
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become  
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the  
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should  
replace it.  
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may  
degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape  
is in good condition before you have your tape  
player serviced.  
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still  
tightened to the rear quarter panel.  
Care of Your Compact Discs  
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases  
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight  
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a  
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and  
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.  
Power Antenna Mast Care (If Equipped)  
Your power antenna will look its best and work well  
if it’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the  
antenna mast:  
1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.  
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling  
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the  
edge of the hole and the outer edge.  
2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or  
equivalent solvent.  
3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing  
any dirt.  
Care of Your Compact Disc Player  
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to  
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with  
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.  
4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.  
5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the  
radio or ignition off and on.  
6. Repeat if necessary.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you can  
easily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit  
and follow the instructions in the kit.  
NOTICE:  
Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication  
could damage it.  
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window  
Antennas (If Equipped)  
The antennas in your vehicle are located in the  
windshield and the rear window. The connectors are at  
the top of the windshield and the top of the rear window  
above the rear window defogger.  
NOTICE:  
Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off  
your radio to make the power antenna go down.  
This will prevent the mast from possibly getting  
damaged. If the antenna does not go down when  
you turn the radio off, it may be damaged or  
need to be cleaned. In either case, lower the  
antenna by hand by carefully pressing the  
antenna down.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road  
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also  
included many other useful tips on driving.  
Defensive Driving  
Drunken Driving  
Control of a Vehicle  
Braking  
Steering  
Off-Road Recovery  
Passing  
Loss of Control  
Driving at Night  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
4-24  
City Driving  
Freeway Driving  
4-6  
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Highway Hypnosis  
Hill and Mountain Roads  
Winter Driving  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Loading Your Vehicle  
Towing A Trailer  
4-14  
4-  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”  
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means  
“always expect the unexpected.”  
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be  
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might  
do. Be ready for their mistakes.  
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of  
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough  
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving  
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never  
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake  
or turn suddenly.  
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on  
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the  
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular  
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on  
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more  
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting  
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or  
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.  
These simple defensive driving techniques could save  
your life.  
Defensive Driving  
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:  
Drive defensively.  
Please start with a very important safety device in your  
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety  
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then  
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”  
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many  
might think. Although it depends on each person and  
situation, here is some general information on  
the problem.  
Drunken Driving  
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to  
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims  
every year.  
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive  
a vehicle:  
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone  
who is drinking depends upon four things:  
Judgment  
The amount of alcohol consumed  
The drinker’s body weight  
Muscular Coordination  
Vision  
The amount of food that is consumed before and  
during drinking  
Attentiveness.  
Police records show that almost half of all motor  
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,  
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking  
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor  
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use  
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.  
The length of time it has taken the drinker to  
consume the alcohol.  
According to the American Medical Association, a  
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce  
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a  
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the  
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses  
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces  
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.  
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult  
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they  
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s  
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.  
There are good medical, psychological and  
developmental reasons for these laws.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a  
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a  
man of her same body weight when each has the same  
number of drinks.  
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC  
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and  
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some  
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all  
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.  
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to  
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it  
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how  
quickly the person drinks them.  
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of  
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of  
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching  
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All  
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.  
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision  
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of  
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of  
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a  
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of  
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a  
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!  
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if  
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces  
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s  
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who  
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a  
somewhat lower BAC level.  
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have  
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol  
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold  
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the  
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to  
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?  
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able  
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.  
CAUTION:  
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.  
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and  
judgment can be affected by even a small amount  
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even  
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.  
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver  
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if  
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will  
not drink.  
There’s something else about drinking and driving that  
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that  
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries  
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or  
heart. This means that when anyone who has been  
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that  
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled  
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Control of a Vehicle  
Braking  
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where  
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and  
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work  
at the places where the tires meet the road.  
Braking action involves perception time and  
reaction time.  
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.  
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your  
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.  
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But  
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver  
and as long as two or three seconds or more with  
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination  
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and  
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle  
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).  
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so  
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others  
is important.  
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly  
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or  
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire  
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the  
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.  
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s  
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires  
and road can provide. That means you can lose control  
of your vehicle.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in  
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy  
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This  
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool  
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much  
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace  
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,  
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That  
means better braking and longer brake life.  
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)  
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an  
advanced electronic braking system that will help  
prevent a braking skid.  
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,  
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may  
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test  
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake  
pedal moves a little. This is normal.  
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake  
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the  
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine  
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But  
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is  
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal  
will be harder to push.  
If there’s a problem with the  
anti-lock brake system, this  
warning light will stay on.  
See “Anti-Lock Brake  
System Warning Light” in  
the Index.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure  
faster than any driver could. The computer is  
programmed to make the most of available tire and  
road conditions.  
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.  
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in  
front of you.  
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.  
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.  
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one  
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will  
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at  
both rear wheels.  
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on  
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE message will  
come on when the TCS system is limiting wheel spin.  
See “TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE Message” in the  
Index. You may feel or hear the system working, but this  
is normal.  
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need  
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease  
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in  
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes  
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave  
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have  
anti-lock brakes.  
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS system  
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will  
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow  
you to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise  
control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)  
Using Anti-Lock  
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down  
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear a  
motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal move a  
little during a stop, but this is normal.  
The SERVICE TRACTION  
SYSTEM message and the  
TCS warning light will  
come on to let you know if  
there’s a problem with your  
TCS system. See  
“SERVICE TRACTION  
SYSTEM Message” in  
the Index.  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Your vehicle has a traction control system called TCS  
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in  
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it  
senses that the rear wheels are spinning too much or are  
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the  
system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power  
(by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to  
limit wheel spin.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION  
SYSTEM message are on, the system will not limit  
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
Active Handling System (Option)  
The optional Active Handling System is a computer  
controlled system that helps the driver maintain  
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving  
conditions. This is accomplished by selectively applying  
any one of the vehicle’s brakes.  
The TCS system automatically comes on whenever you  
start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in  
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the  
system on. But you can turn the TCS system off if you  
ever need to.  
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive  
away (6 mph (10 km/h)), the message ACT HNDLG  
WARMING UP may be displayed in the DIC, the  
instrument cluster light will be on, and a chime will  
sound. This is normal. You can acknowledge this  
message by pressing the RESET button. The Active  
Handling System performance is affected until the  
message, WARM UP COMPLETE, is displayed in  
the DIC.  
To turn the system off, press  
the button located on the  
console. You can turn the  
system ON or OFF at any  
time by pressing the TCS  
switch. The DIC will  
display the appropriate  
message when you push  
the button.  
The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come on when  
the system is operating. See “Driver Information Center  
Messages” in the Index for more information. You may  
also feel or hear the system working. This is normal.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The SERVICE ACTIVE  
HNDLG message will be  
displayed, the instrument  
cluster light will come on,  
and a chime will sound to  
let you know if there is a  
problem with the system.  
See “Driver Information  
Center Messages” in the  
Index for more information.  
To turn the system off, press  
the ACTIVE HANDLING  
button on the console. You  
can turn the system on and  
off at any time by pressing  
the button. The DIC will  
display the appropriate  
message when you push  
the button.  
When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG  
message are on, the system is not operational. Adjust  
your driving accordingly.  
Competitive Driving  
The driver can select an optional handling mode by  
depressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the  
console for more than five seconds, while the vehicle is  
stopped with the ignition on. Competitive Driving mode  
allows the driver to have full control of the rear wheels  
while the Active Handling System helps steer the  
vehicle by selective brake application. The instrument  
cluster light will not be on. The Traction Control System  
will not be operating. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
The Active Handling System comes on automatically  
whenever you start your car. To help maintain  
directional control of the vehicle, you should always  
leave the system on. You can turn the system off if you  
ever need to. If you turn the Active Handling System  
off, the Traction Control System will also be turned off.  
Adjust your driving accordingly.  
When you press the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the  
console again or turn the ignition to ACC, the Active  
Handling and the Traction Control Systems will be on.  
The message TRAC/ACT HNDLG ON will be displayed  
temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to  
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The  
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it  
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn  
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep  
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever  
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.  
Braking in Emergencies  
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same  
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more  
than even the very best braking.  
Steering  
Power Steering  
If you lose power steering assist because the engine  
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but  
it will take much more effort.  
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the  
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle  
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While  
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you  
can control.  
Magnasteer  
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.  
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control  
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do  
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the  
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those  
places. You can lose control. Refer to “Traction  
Control System” in the Index.  
Your vehicle is equipped with GM Magnasteer, a  
steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you  
feel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease  
when parking yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.  
Steering Tips  
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the  
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it  
to go, and slow down.  
Driving on Curves  
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.  
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on  
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:  
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should  
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are  
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less  
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a  
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front  
wheels are straight ahead.  
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the  
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to  
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then  
accelerate gently into the straightaway.  
Steering in Emergencies  
There are times when steering can be more effective  
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and  
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls  
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between  
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can  
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in  
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s  
the time for evasive action -- steering around  
the problem.  
An emergency like this requires close attention and a  
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at  
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can  
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing  
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and  
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have  
avoided the object.  
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like  
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in  
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to  
remove as much speed as you can from a possible  
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or  
right depending on the space available.  
The fact that such emergency situations are always  
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at  
all times and wear safety belts properly.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Off-Road Recovery  
Passing  
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the  
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.  
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a  
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,  
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes  
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?  
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane  
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the  
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming  
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in  
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can  
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the  
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.  
So here are some tips for passing:  
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to  
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing  
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about  
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.  
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.  
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a  
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken  
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass  
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid  
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,  
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.  
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the  
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer  
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.  
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn  
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.  
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down  
the roadway.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and  
start your left lane change signal before moving out  
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough  
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your  
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal  
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that  
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you  
just passed may seem to be farther away from you  
than it really is.)  
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass  
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,  
following too closely reduces your area of vision,  
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also,  
you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead  
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a  
reasonable distance.  
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,  
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t  
get too close. Time your move so you will be  
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the  
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a  
“running start” that more than makes up for the  
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if  
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,  
you need only slow down and drop back again and  
wait for another opportunity.  
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time  
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the  
next vehicle.  
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.  
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may  
be slowing down or starting to turn.  
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the  
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you  
can ease a little to the right.  
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait  
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to  
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.  
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check  
the blind spot.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
If your TCS system is off, then an acceleration skid  
is also best handled by easing your foot off the  
accelerator pedal.  
Loss of Control  
Let’s review what driving experts say about what  
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering  
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the  
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.  
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the  
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your  
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a  
second skid if it occurs.  
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to  
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of  
less danger.  
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,  
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll  
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these  
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery  
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and  
vehicle control more limited.  
Skidding  
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.  
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  
care suited to existing conditions, and by not  
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are  
always possible.  
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try  
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or  
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower  
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.  
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your  
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning  
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on  
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow  
down when you have any doubt.  
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s  
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels  
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too  
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and  
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too  
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.  
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off  
the accelerator pedal.  
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps  
avoid only the braking skid.  
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid  
only the acceleration skid.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the  
Driving at Night  
glare from headlamps behind you.  
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to  
slow down and keep more space between you and  
other vehicles.  
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your  
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.  
In remote areas, watch for animals.  
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place  
and rest.  
Night Vision  
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as  
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old  
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the  
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.  
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night  
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright  
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will  
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re  
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut  
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot  
of things invisible.  
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One  
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by  
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.  
Here are some tips on night driving.  
Drive defensively.  
Don’t drink and drive.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching  
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several  
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you  
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who  
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with  
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring  
directly into the approaching headlamps.  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle  
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much  
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass  
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes  
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,  
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.  
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a  
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your  
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly  
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be  
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes  
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night  
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and  
aren’t even aware of it.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet  
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because  
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.  
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get  
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be  
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The  
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are  
tuned for driving on dry pavement.  
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your  
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain  
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,  
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even  
people walking.  
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in  
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled  
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper  
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing  
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to  
separate from the inserts.  
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even  
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.  
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.  
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There  
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The  
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.  
CAUTION:  
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work  
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to  
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.  
Driving Through Deep Standing Water  
NOTICE:  
After driving through a large puddle of water or  
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until  
your brakes work normally.  
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or  
standing water, water can come in through your  
engine’s air intake and badly damage your  
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly  
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you  
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive  
through them very slowly.  
Hydroplaning  
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up  
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.  
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re  
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,  
it has little or no contact with the road.  
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips  
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your  
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or  
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on  
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone  
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the  
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.  
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following  
distance. And be especially careful when you pass  
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room  
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted  
by road spray.  
Have good tires with proper tread depth.  
(See “Tires” in the Index.)  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:  
City Driving  
Know the best way to get to where you are going.  
Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown  
part of the city just as you would for a  
cross-country trip.  
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most  
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the  
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)  
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light  
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.  
When a light turns green, and just before you start to  
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not  
cleared the intersection or may be running the  
red light.  
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the  
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for  
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to  
traffic signals.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep  
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same  
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or  
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the  
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.  
Freeway Driving  
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the  
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you  
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to  
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to  
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to  
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check  
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as  
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.  
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the  
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay  
in the right lane unless you want to pass.  
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use  
your turn signal.  
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,  
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest  
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it  
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs  
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,  
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in  
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America. They’ll  
be ready and willing to help if you need it.  
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your  
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your  
“blind” spot.  
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you  
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move  
slightly slower at night.  
Here are some things you can check before a trip:  
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper  
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,  
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to  
the next exit.  
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are  
all windows clean inside and outside?  
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?  
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.  
The exit speed is usually posted.  
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked  
all levels?  
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not  
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance  
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going  
slower than you actually are.  
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?  
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,  
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for  
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the  
recommended pressure?  
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook  
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short  
time to avoid a major storm system?  
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you  
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s  
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part  
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you  
can easily drive in.  
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Highway Hypnosis  
Hill and Mountain Roads  
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?  
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it  
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.  
There is something about an easy stretch of road with  
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the  
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind  
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it  
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the  
road in less than a second, and you could crash and  
be injured.  
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be  
aware that it can happen.  
Then here are some tips:  
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a  
comfortably cool interior.  
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to  
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your  
instruments frequently.  
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from  
driving in flat or rolling terrain.  
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service  
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or  
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as  
an emergency.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re  
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make  
your trips safer and more enjoyable.  
CAUTION:  
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid  
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and  
transmission. These parts can work hard on  
mountain roads.  
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the  
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to  
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so  
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then  
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.  
You could crash. Always have your engine running  
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.  
Know how to go down hills. The most important  
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the  
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go  
down a steep or long hill.  
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down  
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine  
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.  
CAUTION:  
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so  
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then  
have poor braking or even none going down a  
hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your  
engine assist your brakes on a steep  
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane  
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut  
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let  
you stay in your own lane.  
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be  
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.  
downhill slope.  
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of  
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or  
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding  
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Winter Driving  
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply  
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer  
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a  
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will  
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag  
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags  
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure  
these items in your vehicle.  
Here are some tips for winter driving:  
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.  
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in  
your vehicle.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold  
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet  
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the  
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about  
freezing (32 F; 0 C) and freezing rain begins to fall.  
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews  
can get there.  
Driving on Snow or Ice  
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the  
road probably have good traction.  
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and  
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll  
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be  
very careful.  
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing  
or loose snow -- drive with caution.  
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your  
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.  
Even though your vehicle has the TCS system, you’ll  
want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road  
conditions. See “Traction Control System” in the Index.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability  
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even  
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll  
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry  
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.  
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard  
Allow greater following distance on any  
slippery road.  
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine  
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an  
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in  
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around  
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.  
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may  
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If  
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you  
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on  
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a  
serious situation. You should probably stay with your  
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help  
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some  
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your  
passengers safe:  
Turn on your hazard flashers.  
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that  
you’ve been stopped by the snow.  
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.  
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body  
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor  
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or  
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.  
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost  
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again  
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable  
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the  
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get  
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises  
every half hour or so until help comes.  
CAUTION:  
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.  
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas  
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill  
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not  
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from  
around the base of your vehicle, especially any  
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check  
around again from time to time to be sure snow  
doesn’t collect there.  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four  
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,  
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.  
Open a window just a little on the side of the  
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help  
keep CO out.  
NOTICE:  
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the  
ground will damage drivetrain components.  
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves  
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster  
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This  
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the  
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to  
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on  
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Loading Your Vehicle  
The other label is the Certification label, found on the  
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross  
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross  
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes  
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.  
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or  
rear axle.  
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it  
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label  
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the  
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation. It  
also gives you important information about the number  
of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight  
that you can carry. This weight is called Vehicle  
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread  
it out. Don’t carry more than 100 lbs. (45 kg) in the  
rear area.  
Capacity Weight and includes the weight of all  
occupants, cargo, and all non-factory-installed options.  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CAUTION:  
CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the  
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear  
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can  
break, and it can change the way your vehicle  
handles. These could cause you to lose control  
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life  
of your vehicle.  
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and  
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in  
a crash.  
Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.  
Try to spread the weight evenly.  
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,  
inside the vehicle so that some of them are  
above the tops of the seats.  
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in  
your vehicle.  
When you carry something inside the  
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.  
NOTICE:  
Your warranty does not cover parts or  
components that fail because of overloading.  
Towing A Trailer  
Your Corvette is neither designed nor intended to tow  
a trailer.  
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,  
tools, packages or anything else -- they will go as fast as  
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or  
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Section 5 Problems on the Road  
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.  
5-3  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
Other Warning Devices  
Jump Starting  
Engine Overheating  
Cooling System  
If a Tire Goes Flat  
5-18  
Towing Your Vehicle  
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow  
5-  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Press this button to make  
your front and rear turn  
signal lamps flash on  
and off.  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
The hazard warning flashers will work once the button  
is pressed, regardless of the key position.  
To turn off the flashers, push the hazard button.  
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn  
signals won’t work.  
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They  
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and  
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Other Warning Devices  
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at  
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind  
your vehicle.  
NOTICE:  
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage  
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by  
your warranty.  
Jump Starting  
The ACDelco Freedom battery in your vehicle  
has a built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or  
jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks  
clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when  
there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a  
cranking complaint.  
If your battery has run down, you may want to use  
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your  
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do  
it safely.  
CAUTION:  
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling  
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.  
Batteries can hurt you. They can be  
dangerous because:  
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt  
battery with a negative ground system.  
They contain acid that can burn you.  
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.  
They contain enough electricity to  
burn you.  
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all  
of these things can hurt you.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
NOTICE:  
NOTICE:  
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a  
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.  
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly  
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by  
your warranty.  
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching  
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground  
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to  
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could  
damage the electrical systems.  
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the  
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on  
each battery.  
CAUTION:  
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug  
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  
lighter or accessory plug. Turn off all lamps that  
aren’t needed as well as the radios. This will avoid  
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it  
could save your radio!  
An electric fan can start up even when the engine  
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,  
clothing and tools away from any underhood  
electric fan.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or  
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.  
The vehicles could be damaged, too.  
CAUTION:  
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic  
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to  
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to an heavy,  
unpainted metal engine part or a body metal surface.  
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will  
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe  
other parts, too. And don’t connect negative (-)  
to negative (-) on the dead battery, as this can  
cause sparks.  
Using a match near a battery can cause battery  
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,  
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if  
you need more light.  
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t  
need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom  
battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if  
a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount  
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care  
of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could  
be present.  
CAUTION:  
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.  
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in  
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with  
water and get medical help immediately.  
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you  
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts  
once the engine is running.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
7. Don’t let the other end  
touch metal. Connect it  
to the positive (+)  
terminal of the good  
battery. Use a remote  
positive (+) terminal if  
the vehicle has one.  
8. Now connect the black  
negative (-) cable to the  
6. Positive (+) goes to positive (+) and negative (-)  
goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part.  
good battery’s  
negative (-) terminal.  
Don’t let the other end  
touch anything until  
the next step.  
Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a  
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it  
won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.  
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent  
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch  
each other or any other metal.  
9. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go  
to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted  
metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the  
dead battery. Attach the cable at least 18 inches  
(46 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near  
engine parts that move. The electrical connection is  
just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting  
back to the battery is much less.  
Removal Procedure  
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part  
B. Good Battery  
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  
the engine for a while.  
C. Dead Battery  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is  
essential that the correct towing equipment is used to  
tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel-lift  
or car-carrier equipment.  
Towing Your Vehicle  
CAUTION:  
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if  
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside  
Assistance” in the Index.  
To help avoid serious personal injury to you  
or others:  
Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is  
being towed.  
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.  
Never tow with damaged parts not  
fully secured.  
Engine Overheating  
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on the  
instrument cluster and a COOLANT OVER TEMP  
message on the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
Never get under your vehicle after it has  
been lifted by the tow truck.  
Always secure the vehicle on each side with  
separate safety chains when towing it.  
Use only the correct hooks.  
Overheated Engine Protection  
Operating Mode  
Should an overheated engine condition exist and the  
messages COOLANT OVER TEMP and REDUCED  
ENGINE POWER are displayed, along with the Check  
Engine light, an overheat protection mode which  
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent  
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in  
power and engine performance. This operating mode  
allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an  
emergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km).  
NOTICE:  
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid  
damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas  
of the vehicle.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
NOTICE:  
CAUTION:  
After driving in the overheated engine protection  
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the  
engine to cool before attempting any repair. The  
engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the  
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the  
oil life monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.  
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you  
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away  
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming  
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away  
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until  
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you  
open the hood.  
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine  
If you keep driving when your engine is  
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or  
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if  
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the  
engine is cool.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,  
try this for a minute or so:  
NOTICE:  
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.  
If your engine catches fire because you keep  
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be  
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be  
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated  
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.  
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan  
speed and open the window as necessary.  
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);  
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while  
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ) or  
THIRD (3) for automatic transmissions.  
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine  
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can  
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.  
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can  
drive normally.  
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no  
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes  
the engine can get a little too hot when you:  
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your  
vehicle right away.  
Climb a long hill on a hot day.  
Stop after high-speed driving.  
Idle for long periods in traffic.  
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three  
minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the  
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the  
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated  
Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in  
this section.  
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service  
help right away.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Cooling System  
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what  
you’ll see:  
CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can  
start up even when the engine is not running and  
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,  
don’t do anything else until it cools down.  
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans  
B. Coolant Surge Tank  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CAUTION:  
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine  
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you  
do, you can be burned.  
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run  
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could  
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.  
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.  
The coolant level should be at or above the  
NOTICE:  
FULL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a  
leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water  
pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.  
Engine damage from running your engine  
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.  
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating  
Mode” in the Index.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant  
Surge Tank  
NOTICE:  
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level  
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark on the coolant surge  
tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be  
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank  
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. (See “Engine  
Coolant” in the Index for more information.)  
When adding coolant, it is important that you use  
only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant.  
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the  
system, premature engine, heater core or  
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the  
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at  
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,  
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use  
of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not  
covered by your new vehicle warranty.  
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to  
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the  
engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If  
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CAUTION:  
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  
system can blow out and burn you badly. They  
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant  
surge tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they  
can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap  
when the cooling system, including the coolant  
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the  
cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure  
cap to cool if you ever have to turn the  
pressure cap.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
NOTICE:  
CAUTION:  
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the  
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So  
use the recommended coolant.  
Adding only plain water to your cooling system  
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other  
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper  
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant  
warning system is set for the proper coolant  
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,  
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t  
get the overheat warning. Your engine could  
catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use  
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL coolant.  
CAUTION:  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper  
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark on the coolant  
surge tank.  
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap  
when the cooling system, including the coolant surge  
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no  
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly  
counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter turn and  
then stop.  
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means  
there is still some pressure left.  
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and  
remove it.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the  
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper  
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine  
cooling fan(s).  
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure  
cap is hand-tight.  
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant  
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add  
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank  
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on the  
coolant surge tank.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
If a Tire Goes Flat  
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,  
Ice or Snow  
Your Chevrolet has neither a spare tire nor tire changing  
equipment, because it was built with Goodyear  
Extended Mobility Tires (EMT). See “Extended  
Mobility Tires” in the Index.  
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will  
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your  
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can  
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must  
use caution.  
CAUTION:  
Because your vehicle has no spare tire, no tire  
changing equipment, and no provisions to store a  
tire in the vehicle, special tools and procedures  
are required if a tire needs to be serviced. If these  
tools and procedures aren’t used, you or others  
could be injured and your vehicle could be  
damaged. Always be sure the proper tools and  
procedures, as described in the Chevrolet  
Corvette Service Manual, are used.  
CAUTION:  
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can  
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,  
the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can  
overheat. That could cause an engine  
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re  
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t  
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown  
on the speedometer.  
To order a service manual, see “Service and Owner  
Publications” in the Index.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out  
NOTICE:  
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will  
clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn  
your TCS System off. (See “Traction Control System”  
in the Index.) Then shift back and forth between  
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels  
as little as possible. For a manual transmission, shift  
slowly between either FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and  
REVERSE (R), allowing the wheels to stop before  
shifting into gear. Release the accelerator pedal while  
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal  
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning  
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you  
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.  
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may  
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,  
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.  
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your  
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels  
too fast while shifting your transmission back  
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.  
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,  
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
NOTES  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
NOTES  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
NOTES  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care  
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,  
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your  
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.  
Service  
Fuel  
6-56  
6-62  
6-62  
6-65  
6-76  
Lifting Your Corvette  
Appearance Care  
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle  
Cleaning a Removable Roof Panel  
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle  
Cleaning Your Convertible Top  
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels  
Cleaning Tires  
Finish Damage  
Underbody Maintenance  
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Service Parts Identification Label  
Electrical System  
Filling Your Tank  
Checking Things Under the Hood  
Engine Oil  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
Automatic Transmission Fluid  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
Hydraulic Clutch  
Rear Axle  
Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
Engine Coolant  
Power Steering Fluid  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
Brakes  
Replacement Bulbs  
Capacities and Specifications  
Air Conditioning Refrigerants  
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts  
Battery  
Bulb Replacement  
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement  
Tires  
6-  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Doing Your Own Service Work  
Service  
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll  
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much  
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual  
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service  
and Owner Publications” in the Index.  
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to  
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for  
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and  
GM-trained and supported service people.  
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.  
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:  
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to  
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air  
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.  
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list  
the mileage and the date of any service work you  
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Fuel  
CAUTION:  
Use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or  
higher for best performance. You may use middle grade  
or regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehicle may not  
accelerate as well.  
You can be injured and your vehicle could be  
damaged if you try to do service work on a  
vehicle without knowing enough about it.  
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications  
which have been developed by the American  
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,  
experience, the proper replacement parts  
and tools before you attempt any vehicle  
maintenance task.  
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and  
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”  
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use  
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break  
or fall off. You could be hurt.  
Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and  
endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers  
Association for better vehicle performance and engine  
protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification  
could provide improved driveability and emission  
control system performance compared to other  
gasolines. For more information, write to: American  
Automobile Manufacturer’s Association, 7430 Second  
Ave, Suite 300, Detroit MI 48202.  
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91  
(at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular). If the  
octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking  
noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage  
your engine.  
Adding Equipment to the Outside of  
Your Vehicle  
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can  
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise  
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with  
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of  
your vehicle.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or  
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs  
service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging  
noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill.  
That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher  
octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant  
knock that means you have a problem.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low  
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive  
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl  
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not  
the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not  
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing  
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your  
emission control system performance may be affected.  
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument  
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your  
authorized Chevrolet dealer for service.  
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission  
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control  
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet  
California specifications. If such fuels are not available  
in states adopting California emissions standards, your  
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting  
federal specifications, but emission control system  
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator  
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your  
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. (See “Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to  
your authorized Chevrolet dealer for diagnosis to  
determine the cause of failure. In the event it is  
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States  
are now required to contain additives that will help  
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel  
system, allowing your emission control system to  
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add  
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing  
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and  
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to  
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that  
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with  
the specifications described earlier.  
determined that the cause of the condition is the type of  
fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Fuels in Foreign Countries  
NOTICE:  
If you plan on driving in another country outside the  
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to  
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not  
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs  
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by  
your warranty.  
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that  
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode  
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage  
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t  
be covered under your warranty.  
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or  
contact a major oil company that does business in the  
country where you’ll be driving.  
You can also write us at the following address for  
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).  
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Filling Your Tank  
CAUTION:  
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns  
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.  
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling  
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking  
materials away from gasoline.  
The fuel filler door release  
is the black button at the  
front of the center console  
storage compartment.  
The fuel filler door is on the driver’s side of the vehicle.  
The fuel cap is attached by a tether for your convenience.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If your fuel filler door release won’t operate, there is a  
manual release tab. The tab is located against the upper  
trim on the driver’s side in the rear compartment.  
While refueling, place the cap in the holder on the fuel  
filler door to prevent damage to your vehicle’s finish.  
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left  
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let  
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from  
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the  
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.  
CAUTION:  
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right  
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure  
you fully install the cap.  
If you get gasoline on yourself and then  
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.  
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the  
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen  
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in  
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and  
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew  
the cap all the way.  
NOTICE:  
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right  
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get  
the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper  
venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system  
might be damaged.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container  
CAUTION:  
Checking Things Under the Hood  
CAUTION:  
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in  
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the  
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can  
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this  
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:  
An electric fan under the hood can start up and  
injure you even when the engine is not running.  
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any  
underhood electric fan.  
Dispense gasoline only into  
approved containers.  
Do not fill a container while it is inside a  
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or  
on any surface other than the ground.  
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the  
inside of the fill opening before operating  
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained  
until the filling is complete.  
CAUTION:  
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and  
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,  
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and  
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others  
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill  
things that will burn onto a hot engine.  
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Hood Release  
NOTICE:  
In order to avoid possible contact of the hood to  
the headlamp doors, care should be taken in  
raising the hood with the headlamps up, or shut  
off the headlamps prior to opening the hood.  
To open the hood, first  
pull the handle inside  
the vehicle.  
Then go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the rear  
edge of the hood, near the windshield.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
When you open the hood, you’ll see the following:  
A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap  
B. Battery  
C. Engine Oil Dipstick  
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap  
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir  
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir  
H. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped)  
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir  
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are  
on properly. Then, just pull the hood down and close  
it firmly.  
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to  
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick  
might not show the actual level.  
Engine Oil  
Checking Engine Oil  
If the LOW OIL LEVEL message on the Driver  
Information Center comes on, it means you need to  
check your engine oil level right away. For more  
information, see “Driver Information Center” in the  
Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly;  
this is an added reminder.  
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or a  
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,  
keeping the tip down.  
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil level every time  
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil  
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.  
The engine oil dipstick is  
next to the coolant surge  
tank. The dipstick handle is  
a round, yellow loop.  
When to Add Engine Oil  
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, you’ll need to  
add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right  
kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For  
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”  
in the Index.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use  
Look for two things:  
NOTICE:  
GM4718M  
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so  
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper  
mark that shows the proper operating range,  
your engine could be damaged.  
The Corvette engine requires a special oil meeting  
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this Standard  
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all  
synthetic oils will meet this GM Standard. You  
should look for and use only an oil that meets GM  
Standard GM4718M.  
The engine oil fill cap is on  
top of the passenger’s side  
valve cover.  
NOTICE:  
If you use oils that don’t have the GM4718M  
Standard designation, you can cause engine  
damage not covered by your warranty.  
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in  
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way  
back in when you’re through.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
SAE 5W-30  
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best  
for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE  
10W-30 if it’s going to be 0 F (-18 C) or above.  
These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity,  
or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as  
SAE 20W-50.  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should also  
have the “Starburst” symbol  
on the container.  
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by  
the American Petroleum Institute (API).  
You should look for this on the oil container, and use  
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM  
Standard 4718M and have the Starburst symbol on the  
front of the oil container.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on  
before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle  
more than 10,000 miles (16 000 km) or 12 months  
(whichever occurs first) without an oil change. Use  
engine oil meeting the GM Standard GM4718M.  
Your Corvette engine is filled at the factory with a  
Mobil 1 synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for  
your vehicle.  
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain  
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M  
may not be available. You can add substitute oil  
designated SAE 5W-30 with the “Starburst” symbol at  
all temperatures. If temperatures are above 0 F (-18 C),  
you may substitute SAE 10W-30 with the “Starburst”  
symbol. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard  
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.  
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive  
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil every  
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE OIL  
SOON message comes on. Remember to reset the  
Engine Oil Life Monitor whenever the oil is changed.  
When Changing the Engine Oil  
Engine Oil Additives  
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to  
advise if you think something should be added.  
There is a special procedure for changing engine oil,  
contact your dealer for additional information or the  
procedure can be found in a Corvette Service Manual.  
To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner  
Publications” in the Index.  
When to Change Engine Oil  
Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to  
change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage,  
but on engine revolutions and engine operating  
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life Monitor  
To reset the monitor after an oil change:  
temperature. When the computer has calculated that the  
oil needs changing, the Oil Life Monitor will indicate  
that a change is necessary. The mileage between oil  
changes will vary depending on how you drive your  
vehicle -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and  
10,000 miles (16 000 km) since your last oil change.  
1. With the ignition on, press the TRIP button so the  
OIL LIFE percentage is displayed.  
2. Press RESET and hold for two seconds. The word  
RESET will appear, then OIL LIFE 99%.  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
What to Do with Used Oil  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain  
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could  
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin  
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and  
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or throw away  
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the  
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of  
oil products.)  
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you  
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil  
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil  
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into  
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,  
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If  
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,  
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling  
center for help.  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to  
replace the air filter.  
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Air Cleaner/Filter Replacement  
CAUTION:  
To remove the air cleaner/filter:  
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter  
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air  
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if  
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the  
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t  
drive with it off, and be careful working on the  
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.  
NOTICE:  
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause  
a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get  
into your engine, which will damage it. Always  
have the air cleaner/filter in place when  
you’re driving.  
1. Pull up on the clips on each side to release  
the assembly.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Automatic Transmission Fluid  
How to Check  
Because this operation is difficult, you may choose to  
have this done at your dealer service department. It is  
not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A  
transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.  
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer service  
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.  
There is a special procedure for checking and changing  
the transmission fluid. Contact your dealer for additional  
information or the procedure can be found in a Corvette  
Service Manual. To purchase a service manual, see  
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.  
2. Pull the assembly out.  
3. Replace the filter.  
NOTICE:  
4. Push the assembly back into place.  
5. Fasten the clips.  
We recommend that only fluid labeled  
DEXRON -III be used, because fluid with  
that label is made specially for your automatic  
transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than  
DEXRON -III is not covered by your new  
vehicle warranty.  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles  
(80 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one of  
these conditions:  
How to Check  
Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose  
to have this done at your Chevrolet dealership  
Service Department.  
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  
regularly reaches 90 F (32 C) or higher.  
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the  
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
High performance operation.  
If you do not use your vehicle under one of these  
conditions, change the fluid and filter every  
100,000 miles (166 000 km).  
NOTICE:  
Too much or too little fluid can damage your  
transmission. Too much can mean that some  
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot  
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure  
to get an accurate reading if you check your  
transmission fluid.  
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for  
the proper service intervals for the transmission fluid  
and filter.  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
When to Check  
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the  
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is  
cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the  
transmission case.  
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is  
changed. However, the fluid in your manual  
transmission doesn’t require changing.  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Then, follow these steps:  
How to Add Fluid  
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance  
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See  
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.  
1. Remove the filler plug.  
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough  
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the  
filler plug hole.  
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.  
4. Tighten the plug to 20 lb-ft (27 N·m).  
Hydraulic Clutch  
The clutch linkage in your vehicle is self-adjusting.  
The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with  
hydraulic clutch fluid.  
1. Remove the filler plug.  
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless  
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid  
won’t correct a leak.  
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of  
the filler plug hole.  
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure  
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more  
fluid as described in the next steps.  
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.  
Have the system inspected and repaired.  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
When to Check and What to Use  
Fluid should be added if the fluid level is below the step  
on the inside of the reservoir. There are additional  
instructions on the reservoir cap.  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how  
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch  
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See  
“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.  
Replace the rubber seal and cap.  
Rear Axle  
When to Check Lubricant  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how  
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance  
Inspections” in the Index.  
How to Check and Add Fluid  
The clutch master cylinder is on the driver’s side of the  
engine compartment, near the fender.  
To check the fluid, remove the cap and rubber seal.  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
How to Check Lubricant  
What to Use  
To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W-90  
Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or  
equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115. To  
completely refill after draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml)  
of Limited-Slip Differential Lubricant Additive  
(GM Part No. 1052358) or equivalent. Then fill to  
the bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic  
Gear Lubricant.  
Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
NOTICE:  
The surge tank pressure cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)  
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to  
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage  
from overheating.  
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,  
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant  
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.  
When you replace the surge tank pressure cap, a GM cap  
is recommended.  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL coolant will:  
Thermostat  
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat  
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the  
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant  
reaches a pre-set temperature.  
Give freezing protection down to -34 F (-37 C).  
Give boiling protection up to 265 F (129 C).  
Protect against rust and corrosion.  
When you replace the thermostat, a GM thermostat  
is recommended.  
Help keep the proper engine temperature.  
Let the warning lights and gages work as  
they should.  
Engine Coolant  
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with  
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed  
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles  
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only  
DEX-COOL extended life coolant.  
NOTICE:  
When adding coolant, it is important that you  
use only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant.  
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to  
the system, premature engine, heater core or  
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the  
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at  
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,  
The following explains your cooling system and how  
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem  
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in  
the Index.  
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the  
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not  
covered by your new vehicle warranty.  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
What to Use  
NOTICE:  
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and  
one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won’t damage  
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you  
don’t need to add anything else.  
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your  
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.  
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your  
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can  
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core  
and other parts.  
CAUTION:  
Adding only plain water to your cooling system  
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other  
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper  
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant  
warning system is set for the proper coolant  
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,  
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t  
get the overheat warning. Your engine could  
catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use  
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL coolant.  
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,  
have your dealer check your cooling system.  
NOTICE:  
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to  
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to  
improve the system. These can be harmful.  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Checking Coolant  
CAUTION:  
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the  
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and  
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.  
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a  
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.  
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your  
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the  
FULL COLD mark. The FULL COLD mark is on  
the front of the coolant surge tank. Don’t overfill the  
surge tank. Too much coolant can result in an overflow  
when the fluid is hot.  
The coolant surge tank is in the engine compartment  
behind the passenger’s side headlamp.  
If the LOW COOLANT message comes on and stays  
on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Adding Coolant  
Power Steering Fluid  
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL  
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the  
engine is cool.  
CAUTION:  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.  
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it  
is hand-tight.  
When to Check Power Steering Fluid  
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering  
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or  
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system  
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected  
and repaired.  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
How to Check Power Steering Fluid  
What to Use  
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and  
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and  
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and  
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and  
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.  
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see  
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.  
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper  
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If  
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to  
the mark.  
What to Use  
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read  
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be  
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature  
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient  
protection against freezing.  
When the engine  
compartment is hot, the  
level should be at the  
HOT mark.  
When the engine  
compartment is cool, the  
level should be at the  
FULL COLD mark.  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Adding Washer Fluid  
NOTICE:  
When using concentrated washer fluid,  
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for  
adding water.  
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer  
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze  
and damage your washer fluid tank and  
other parts of the washer system. Also,  
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.  
Fill your washer fluid tank only  
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This  
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,  
which could damage the tank if it is  
completely full.  
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in  
your windshield washer. It can damage  
your washer system and paint.  
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add  
washer fluid until the tank is full.  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake  
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your  
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.  
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid  
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much  
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add  
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is  
done on the brake hydraulic system.  
CAUTION:  
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill  
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine  
is hot enough. You or others could be burned,  
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake  
fluid only when work is done on the brake  
hydraulic system.  
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s  
side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT-3  
brake fluid.  
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the  
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid  
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake  
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level  
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to  
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance  
Inspections” in the Index.  
6-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Checking Brake Fluid  
CAUTION:  
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.  
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level  
should be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it  
isn’t, have your brake system checked to see if there  
is a leak.  
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake  
system, your brakes may not work well, or they  
may not even work at all. This could cause a  
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.  
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make  
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.  
What to Add  
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake  
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.  
Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the  
Maintenance Schedule.  
NOTICE:  
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage  
brake system parts. For example, just a few  
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine  
oil, in your brake system can damage brake  
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be  
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the  
wrong kind of fluid.  
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area  
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep  
dirt from entering the reservoir.  
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s  
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be  
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on  
your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.  
See “Appearance Care” in the Index.  
6-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake  
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly  
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with  
your brakes.  
Brake Wear  
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.  
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a  
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn  
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or  
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when  
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).  
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  
axle sets.  
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of  
this manual under Part C “Periodic  
Maintenance Inspections.”  
CAUTION:  
Brake Pedal Travel  
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to  
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal  
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.  
The brake wear warning sound means that soon  
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to  
an accident. When you hear the brake wear  
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.  
Brake Adjustment  
As you make brake stops, your disc brakes  
automatically adjust for wear.  
NOTICE:  
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads  
could result in costly brake repair.  
6-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Replacing Brake System Parts  
Vehicle Storage  
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many  
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if  
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle  
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.  
When you replace parts of your braking system -- for  
example, when your brake linings wear down and you  
have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get new  
approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes  
may no longer work properly. For example, if someone  
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the  
balance between your front and rear brakes can  
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or  
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the  
battery. This will help keep your battery from  
running down.  
CAUTION:  
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas  
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you  
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index  
for tips on working around a battery without  
getting hurt.  
change -- for the worse. The braking performance you’ve  
come to expect can change in many other ways if someone  
puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.  
Battery  
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle  
for longer storage periods.  
Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco Freedom  
battery. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend  
an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get one that has the  
replacement number shown on the original battery’s  
label. For battery replacement, see your dealer or the  
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see  
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. After  
the battery has been replaced, refer to the “Remote  
Function Actuation System” in the Index to  
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent  
Feature” in the Index.  
resynchronize your transmitter(s).  
6-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Headlamps  
Bulb Replacement  
1. The headlamp doors need to be halfway open. Turn  
the headlamp switch on, then quickly back to the  
parking lamps setting. You may have to do this a few  
times to get the half-open position.  
For the proper type of replacement bulb, see  
“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.  
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this  
section, contact your Chevrolet dealer’s  
service department.  
Halogen Bulbs  
CAUTION:  
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and  
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or  
others could be injured. Be sure to read and  
follow the instructions on the bulb package.  
You can also open the headlamp doors manually by  
turning the adjuster counterclockwise.  
6-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
2. Remove the screws on each side of the  
headlamp bezel.  
5. Reach behind the lamp and turn the bulb  
counterclockwise to remove it. Don’t touch the  
halogen bulbs. The inner bulb is the high beam and  
the outer bulb is the low beam.  
3. Open the hood.  
4. To remove the bezel, pull the sides slightly outward  
and tilt the bezel forward. Pull the clip centered  
above the lens outward. Be careful not to scratch  
the paint.  
6. Disconnect the desired bulb from the wiring harness.  
7. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.  
6-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Front Turn Signal Lamps  
Front Sidemarker Lamps  
1. Remove the front fascia close-out panel  
attaching bolts.  
1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 in “Front Turn Signal  
Lamps” described previously.  
2. Remove the front fascia close-out panel.  
2. Turn the socket one-quarter of a turn  
counterclockwise and pull it out.  
3. Grasp the cooling duct and pull to release it from the  
front fascia, then reposition it. This will give you  
better access to the bulb.  
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.  
4. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.  
4. Squeeze the tab on the socket and turn it  
counterclockwise to remove the socket with the bulb.  
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.  
6. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.  
6-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps  
1. Remove the screws.  
2. Pull the taillamp housing assembly out.  
A. Back-up Lamp  
B. Inboard Taillamp  
C. Outboard Taillamp  
6-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
3. To remove the socket with the bulb, squeeze the tab  
while you turn the socket counterclockwise.  
4. Remove the bulb from the socket.  
5. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.  
6-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Back-Up Lamps  
You can access the back-up lamps through the inboard  
taillamp opening. See “Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps”  
in the Index.  
Windshield Wiper  
Blade Replacement  
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least  
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade  
1. Squeeze the tab on the socket while turning it  
counterclockwise to remove it from the assembly.  
Check” in Section 7 of this manual under Part B “Owner  
Checks and Services” for more information.  
2. Remove the bulb from the socket.  
Replacement blades come in different types and are  
removed in different ways. For the proper type and  
length, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in  
the Index.  
3. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.  
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade  
assembly every six months.  
NOTICE:  
Use care when removing or installing a blade  
assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the arm  
to fall back and strike the windshield.  
6-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
3. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab  
To remove the wiper blade assembly:  
(C). Pull down on the blade assembly (A) to release  
it from the wiper arm hook (F).  
1. Open the hood to gain access to the  
windshield wipers.  
4. Remove the insert from the blade assembly (A). The  
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by  
the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the  
2. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position.  
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.  
A. Blade Assembly  
B. Arm Assembly  
C. Locking Tab  
D. Blade Pivot  
E. Hook Slot  
F. Arm Hook  
6-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook. Pull  
To install the new wiper insert:  
up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot.  
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly  
onto the windshield.  
Installation guide:  
1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the end  
with two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all the way  
through the blade claws at the opposite end (B).  
Plastic caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is  
fully installed.  
2. Be sure the notches are locked by the bottom claws.  
Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on  
both sides of the insert slots.  
A. Claw in Notch  
C. Incorrect Installation  
B. Correct Installation  
6-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Tires  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by  
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions  
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see  
your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details.  
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as  
overloaded tires. The resulting accident  
could cause serious injury. Check all tires  
frequently to maintain the recommended  
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked  
when your tires are cold.  
CAUTION:  
Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,  
punctured or broken by a sudden  
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires  
are dangerous.  
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.  
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your  
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have  
been damaged, replace them.  
Overloading your tires can cause  
overheating as a result of too much friction.  
You could have an air-out and a serious  
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in  
the Index.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
6-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an  
authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Extended Mobility Tires  
Your vehicle, when new, had Goodyear Extended  
Mobility Tires (EMT). There’s no spare tire, no tire  
changing equipment and no place to store a tire in the  
vehicle. Extended Mobility Tires perform so well  
without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is  
used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.  
If a tire’s inflation pressure is between 5 psi (35 kPa)  
and 25 psi (170 kPa), you will see a message on the  
Driver Information Center. This message will show  
which tire is underinflated and two chimes will sound.  
An example would be LOW TIRE PRESSURE-LR.  
This would mean that the inflation pressure in your left  
rear tire is between 5 psi (35 kPa) and 25 psi (170 kPa).  
If the inflation pressure in the tire drops below 5 psi  
(35 kPa), the message would read FLAT TIRE-LR and  
four chimes will sound. See “Driver Information  
Center” in the Index.  
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) has a sensor on  
each road wheel that transmits to a receiver on the  
instrument panel.  
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and  
with Industry and Science Canada.  
The TPM will also alert you if a tire’s pressure is higher  
than 42 psi (290 kPa). The message will show which tire  
is overinflated and two chimes will sound. An example  
would be HIGH PRESSURE-LR. This would mean that  
the inflation pressure in your left rear tire is higher than  
42 psi (290 kPa). See “Driver Information Center” in  
the Index.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry and  
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
If a tire pressure message appears on the Driver  
Information Center, stop as soon as you can. Have the  
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your  
Tire Loading Information label. See “Inflation -- Tire  
Pressure” in the Index.  
6-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
cushion between the road and the wheel. Because you  
won’t have this cushion when driving on a deflated tire,  
try to avoid potholes that could damage your wheel and  
require replacement of it.  
CAUTION:  
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT  
TIRE message is displayed on the Driver  
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling  
capabilities will be reduced during severe  
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose  
control of your vehicle. You or others could be  
injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when  
the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE  
message is displayed. Drive cautiously, and check  
your tire pressures as soon as you can.  
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.  
This damage could occur even before you’ve driven on  
the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been  
damaged, or if you’ve driven any distance on a deflated  
EMT, check with an authorized Goodyear EMT Service  
Center to determine whether the tire can be repaired or  
should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s extended  
mobility feature, all replacement tires must be Extended  
Mobility Tires. As soon as possible, contact the nearest  
authorized Chevrolet or Goodyear EMT servicing  
facility for inspection and repair or replacement. Call  
Chevrolet at 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)  
or Goodyear at 1-800-789-9878 24-hours a day for  
information on the location of the nearest EMT  
If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the side of  
the road to change the tire. You can just keep on driving.  
The shorter the distance you drive and the slower the  
speed, the greater the chance that the tire will not have  
to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated EMT for  
50 miles (80 km) or less and at speeds of 55 mph  
(90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that the tire can  
be repaired. The tire can operate effectively with no air  
pressure for up to 200 miles (320 km) at speeds up to  
55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then have to be  
replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it provides a  
servicing facility. In Canada, contact the Customer  
Communication Center at 1-800-263-3777, or Canadian  
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-268-6800. You can also  
use the Goodyear number listed above to locate an  
authorized EMT servicing facility.  
6-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
NOTICE:  
CAUTION:  
Using liquid sealants can damage the tire valves  
and tire pressure monitor sensors in your  
extended mobility tires. This damage would not  
be covered by warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants  
in your extended mobility tires.  
Extended mobility tires are constructed  
differently than other tires and could explode  
during improper service. You or others could be  
injured or killed if you attempt to repair, replace,  
dismount, or mount an extended mobility tire.  
Let only an authorized Goodyear EMT Service  
Center repair, replace, dismount and mount  
extended mobility tires.  
If your vehicle is equipped with Goodyear Eagle F1-GS  
tires and you feel that winter tires are needed for your  
driving conditions, Goodyear Eagle M+S EMT tires are  
available in your original equipment sizes from an  
authorized Goodyear EMT retailer. These tires will  
improve snow traction while maintaining your  
Corvette’s extended mobility feature. When using winter  
tires on your vehicle, be sure to use them on all four  
wheels. See “Buying New Tires” in the Index. If your  
vehicle is equipped with Goodyear Eagle RS-A tires,  
they are all-season rated tires.  
The valve stems on your extended mobility tires have  
sensors that are part of the TPM. These sensors contain  
batteries which are designed to last for 10 years under  
normal driving conditions. See your dealer if you ever  
need to have a wheel replaced, or if the sensors ever  
need replacement.  
6-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Inflation -- Tire Pressure  
NOTICE: (Continued)  
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the  
rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct  
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.  
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least  
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),  
you can get the following:  
Unusual wear  
Bad handling  
Rough ride  
NOTICE:  
Needless damage from road hazards.  
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or  
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires  
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can  
get the following:  
When to Check  
Check your tires once a month or more.  
How to Check  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Bad wear  
Bad handling  
Bad fuel economy.  
With the Tire Pressure Monitor, you can check tire  
inflation pressures while driving. After you’ve reached a  
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more, press and release  
the GAGES button on the Driver Information Center  
(DIC) until the front tire pressures are displayed. Then,  
press and release the GAGES button for the rear tire  
pressures. If the display doesn’t show tire pressure, or if  
the SERVICE TIRE MON SYS message appears, see  
your dealer for service.  
NOTICE: (Continued)  
6-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep  
Tire Rotation  
The tires on your Corvette are different sizes front to rear.  
Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tire and  
wheel should be used only in the position it is in.  
enough to show cord or fabric.  
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.  
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that  
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location  
of the damage.  
When It’s Time for New Tires  
One way to tell when it’s  
time for new tires is to  
check the treadwear  
Buying New Tires  
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at  
the Tire-Loading Information label.  
indicators, which will  
appear when your tires have  
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or  
less of tread remaining.  
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had  
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)  
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,  
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way  
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed  
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,  
traction, ride and other things during normal service on  
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread  
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”  
(for mud and snow).  
You need a new tire if any of the following statements  
are true:  
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a  
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,  
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,  
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.  
You can see the indicators at three or more places  
around the tire.  
You can see cord or fabric showing through the  
tire’s rubber.  
6-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
CAUTION:  
The following information relates to the system  
developed by the United States National Highway  
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by  
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This  
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The  
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger  
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does  
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,  
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with  
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),  
or to some limited-production tires.  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while  
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other  
than those originally installed on your vehicle) or  
types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle  
may not handle properly, and you could have a  
crash. Using tires of different sizes (other than  
those originally installed on your vehicle) may  
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use  
the correct size and type tires on all four wheels.  
While the tires available on General Motors passenger  
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these  
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety  
requirements and additional General Motors Tire  
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.  
If you feel that winter tires are needed, see “Extended  
Mobility Tires” in the Index.  
CAUTION:  
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the  
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after  
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could  
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply  
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.  
6-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Treadwear  
Temperature -- A, B, C  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  
conditions on a specified government test course. For  
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half  
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and  
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations  
in driving habits, service practices and differences in  
road characteristics and climate.  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of  
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the  
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and  
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.  
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the  
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.  
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance  
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required  
by law.  
Traction -- AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,  
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop  
on wet pavement as measured under controlled  
conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade  
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking  
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.  
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is  
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not  
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or  
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,  
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
6-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts  
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original  
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the  
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced  
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life  
and best overall performance.  
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not  
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or  
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment  
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle  
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels  
may need to be rebalanced.  
CAUTION:  
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts  
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It  
could affect the braking and handling of your  
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose  
control. You could have a collision in which you or  
others could be injured. Always use the correct  
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.  
Wheel Replacement  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted  
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,  
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the  
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum  
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your  
dealer if any of these conditions exist.  
NOTICE:  
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.  
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying  
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the  
same way as the one it replaces.  
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with  
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or  
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper  
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire  
clearance to the body and chassis.  
6-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
CAUTION:  
CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel could come  
off and cause an accident. When you change a  
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places  
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an  
emergency, you can use a cloth or paper towel to  
do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush  
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.  
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened  
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose  
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.  
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have  
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original  
equipment wheel nuts.  
NOTICE:  
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to  
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid  
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel  
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper  
torque specification.  
CAUTION:  
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you  
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could  
fall off, causing a serious accident.  
6-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Used Replacement Wheels  
If you or someone else is going to remove the wheels on  
your vehicle, make sure that the special wheel nut socket  
and wheel lock key are being used.  
CAUTION:  
NOTICE:  
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is  
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or  
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly  
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a  
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.  
Your wheels could be damaged if the wheel nut  
socket is not used to remove your vehicle’s wheels.  
The wheel nut socket can be used with an air wrench or  
a torque wrench. The wheel lock key can be used with a  
torque wrench, but not with an air or impact wrench.  
Using the Wheel Lock Key  
If you have a hardtop, the wheel lock key sits in a small  
depression in the trunk rail, on the left-hand side,  
underneath the carpeting.  
NOTICE:  
If you have a coupe or a convertible, the wheel lock key  
sits in a small depression in the trunk rail directly under  
the left-hand rear compartment cover.  
Your wheel lock key or lock nuts could be  
damaged if an air or impact wrench is used with  
this key.  
Your vehicle’s wheel lock key has a unique registration  
number. The registration number is printed on a card  
included in your lock nut package. Also on this card is  
lost key replacement information. This number is not  
recorded by GM or your dealer, so be sure not to lose  
this card. You will need the information if you ever lose  
your wheel lock key.  
6-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Tire Chains  
Lifting Your Corvette  
CAUTION:  
NOTICE:  
Don’t use tire chains. They can damage your  
vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.  
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The vehicle  
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other  
people. You and they could be badly injured.  
Find a level place to lift your vehicle. To help  
prevent the vehicle from moving:  
Use another type of traction device only if its  
manufacturer recommends it for use on your  
vehicle and tire size combination and road  
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s  
instructions. To help avoid damage to your  
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the  
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t  
spin your wheels.  
1. Set the parking brake firmly.  
2. Put an automatic transmission shift  
lever in PARK (P), or shift a manual  
transmission to FIRST (1) or  
REVERSE (R).  
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install  
them on the rear tires.  
3. Turn off the engine.  
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,  
you can put blocks in front of and behind  
the wheels.  
6-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If you ever use a jack to lift your Corvette, such as to  
display it at a show, follow the instructions that came  
with the jack, and be sure to use the correct lifting points  
to avoid damaging your vehicle.  
CAUTION:  
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is  
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you  
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under  
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.  
NOTICE:  
Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage your  
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by  
your warranty. To lift your vehicle properly,  
follow the advice in this part.  
CAUTION:  
To help prevent vehicle damage:  
Be sure to place a block or pad between the  
jack and the vehicle.  
Make sure the jack you’re using spans at  
least two crossmember ribs.  
Lift only in the areas shown in the  
following pictures.  
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly  
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make  
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and  
vehicle damage, be sure to place the jack in the  
proper location before raising the vehicle.  
For additional information, see your dealer and  
the Chevrolet Corvette service manual.  
6-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Lifting From the Front  
The front lifting point can be accessed from either the  
driver’s or passenger’s side of the vehicle, behind the  
front tires.  
1. Locate the lifting point (B) on either side of your  
vehicle to jack the vehicle according to the  
illustration shown.  
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and  
the vehicle.  
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack  
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (A).  
6-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Lifting From the Rear  
The rear lifting point can be accessed from the rear of  
the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.  
1. Locate the lifting point to jack your vehicle  
according to the illustration shown.  
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and  
the vehicle.  
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack  
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (A).  
For more information, see “Doing Your Own Service  
Work” in the Index.  
6-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.  
Appearance Care  
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:  
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some  
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a  
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are  
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.  
When you use anything from a container to clean your  
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings  
and instructions. And always open your doors or  
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.  
Alcohol  
Laundry Soap  
Bleach  
Reducing Agents  
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle  
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose  
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces  
with a clean, damp cloth.  
Never use these to clean your vehicle:  
Gasoline  
Benzene  
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet  
Naphtha  
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior  
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil  
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean  
normal spots and stains very well. You can get  
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See  
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)  
Carbon Tetrachloride  
Acetone  
Paint Thinner  
Turpentine  
Lacquer Thinner  
Nail Polish Remover  
Here are some cleaning tips:  
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.  
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.  
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.  
They can all be hazardous -- some more than  
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.  
6-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a  
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains  
are stubborn.  
Cleaning Coated Moldings  
These moldings are around the hatch opening in the  
rear area.  
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the  
entire area immediately or it will set.  
When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft  
lint-free cloth dampened with water.  
Fabric Protection  
When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.  
Your vehicle has carpet that has been treated with  
Scotchgard Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects  
fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the carriers  
of most stains. Even with this protection, you still need  
to clean your carpet often to keep it looking new.  
Cleaning Leather  
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or  
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the  
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.  
Further information on cleaning is available by calling  
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).  
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your  
dealer for this product.  
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive  
Cleaning Vinyl  
Use warm water and a clean cloth.  
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.  
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned  
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the  
finish, it can harm the leather.  
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You  
may have to do it more than once.  
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you  
don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a  
vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.  
6-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel  
Care of Safety Belts  
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces  
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or  
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield  
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield  
under certain conditions.  
Keep belts clean and dry.  
CAUTION:  
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it  
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they  
might not be able to provide adequate protection.  
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and  
lukewarm water.  
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components  
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft c  
loth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the  
surface finish.  
Cleaning Soft-Touch Paint Surfaces  
Use only mild soap and water to clean the Soft-Touch  
paint surfaces.  
Cleaning Glass Surfaces  
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a  
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal  
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. (See  
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)  
Cleaning the Security Shade and  
Convenience Net  
Wash with warm water and mild detergent, rinse with  
cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not use  
chlorine bleach.  
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may  
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear  
window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If  
abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear  
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.  
Any temporary license should not be attached across the  
defogger grid.  
6-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Cleaning the Outside of the  
Windshield and Wiper Blades  
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield  
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,  
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade  
or windshield.  
Weatherstrips  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply  
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six  
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent  
application may be required. (See “Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)  
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM  
Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami Powder (non-scratching  
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The  
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse  
it with water.  
Cleaning a Removable Roof Panel  
Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing  
and/or storing the roof panel.  
Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry  
the panel.  
If you use a glass treatment or conditioner containing  
ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on your glass, be sure to  
remove the acrylic roof panel, if so equipped. These  
products may damage the panel.  
Clean the panel with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave the  
cleaner on the panel for one minute, then wipe the  
panel with a soft, lint-free cloth.  
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades  
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping  
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength  
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade  
with water.  
Don’t use abrasive cleaning materials.  
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;  
replace blades that look worn.  
6-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on the roof  
panel, impurities in the water will adhere to the top.  
These impurities may etch or mar the finish. When the  
panel gets wet, you should dry it off.  
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t  
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that  
contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be  
flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface,  
or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean  
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface  
scratches and water spotting.  
NOTICE:  
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter  
your vehicle.  
Do not use a glass treatment or conditioner  
containing ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on the  
roof panel. These products may damage  
the panel.  
NOTICE:  
Conveyor systems on some automatic car washes  
may damage a Corvette. They may not have  
enough clearance for the undercarriage or for the  
wide rear tires.  
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle  
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth  
of color, gloss retention and durability.  
Check with the manager before using a car wash.  
Washing Your Vehicle  
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it  
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses  
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.  
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or  
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,  
removing all soap residue completely. You can get  
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See  
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car  
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow  
instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”  
6-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather  
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period  
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking  
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered  
whenever possible.  
Finish Care  
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by  
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint  
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products  
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”  
in the Index.)  
Cleaning Your Convertible Top  
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The  
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat.  
Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and  
made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.  
Your convertible top should be cleaned often. If you use  
an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and  
hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause  
water to enter your vehicle.  
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade. Use  
a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge. A  
chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a brush  
can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Don’t use  
detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.  
NOTICE:  
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on  
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the  
finish or leave swirl marks.  
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid  
spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for a  
few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild  
foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle,  
then let the top dry in direct sunlight.  
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird  
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can  
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted  
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If  
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked  
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.  
6-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
To protect the convertible top:  
Cleaning Tires  
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.  
After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is  
completely dry before you lower it.  
Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted finish;  
it could leave streaks.  
NOTICE:  
If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,  
ask the manager if the equipment could damage  
your top.  
When applying a tire dressing always take care to  
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted  
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.  
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint  
finish and tires.  
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels  
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with  
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After  
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax  
may then be applied.  
Finish Damage  
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish  
should be repaired right away.  
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted  
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,  
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up  
materials available from your dealer or other service  
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected  
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.  
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners  
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because  
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish  
on any wheels other than chrome-plated wheels.  
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash  
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These  
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.  
6-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Magnesium Wheel Finish  
NOTICE:  
Fiberglass Springs  
NOTICE:  
Improper paint repair or refinishing can cause  
corrosion damage to a magnesium wheel. See  
your dealer if a magnesium wheel needs paint  
repair or refinishing.  
Don’t use corrosive or acidic cleaning agents,  
engine degreasers, aluminum cleaning agents or  
other harsh solvents to clean fiberglass springs;  
they’ll damage the springs.  
Underbody Maintenance  
Chemical Paint Spotting  
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not  
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the  
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and  
exhaust system even though they have  
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a  
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage  
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped  
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into  
the paint surface.  
corrosion protection.  
At least every spring, flush these materials from the  
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud  
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas  
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.  
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do  
this for you.  
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,  
Chevrolet will repair, at no charge to the owner, the  
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout  
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)  
of purchase, whichever occurs first.  
6-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials  
PART NUMBER  
994954  
SIZE  
DESCRIPTION  
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated  
Tar and Road Oil Remover  
Chrome Cleaner and Polish  
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner  
Vinyl Cleaner  
USAGE  
23 in. x 25 in.  
16 oz. (0.473 L)  
16 oz. (0.473 L)  
16 oz. (0.473 L)  
32 oz. (0.946 L)  
23 oz. (0.680 L)  
Exterior polishing cloth  
1050172  
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt  
1050173  
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass  
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls  
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops  
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints  
1050174  
1050214  
1050427  
Glass Cleaner  
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,  
rubber and vinyl  
1052918**  
1052925  
8 oz. (0.237 L)  
16 oz. (0.473 L)  
Armor All Protectant  
Multi-Purpose Interior  
Cleaner  
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels  
and floor mats  
1052929  
1052930  
16 oz. (0.473 L)  
8 oz. (0.237 L)  
2.5 sq. ft.  
Wheel Cleaner  
Capture Dry Spot Remover  
Synthetic Chamois  
Silicone Tire Shine  
Finish Enhancer  
Spray on and rinse with water  
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric  
Shines vehicle without scratching  
12345721  
12345725  
12377964*  
12377966*  
12377984*  
12 oz. (0.354 L)  
16 oz. (0.473 L)  
16 oz. (0.473 L)  
16 oz. (0.473 L)  
Spray on tire shine  
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants  
Cleaner Wax  
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish  
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks  
Surface Cleaner  
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.  
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.  
* For exterior use only.  
**Not recommended for use on instrument panels.  
6-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Service Parts Identification Label  
You’ll find this label located inside the glovebox. It’s  
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this  
label is:  
your VIN,  
the model designation,  
paint information and  
a list of all production options and  
special equipment.  
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on  
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the  
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the  
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also  
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts  
labels and the certificates of title and registration.  
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.  
Engine Identification  
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This  
code will help you identify your engine, specifications  
and replacement parts.  
6-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Accessory Power Plug  
Electrical System  
This plug can be used to connect electrical equipment  
such as a cellular phone or CB radio. The accessory  
power plug is located behind the passenger side  
toe-board at the top left corner near the body control  
module. Be sure to follow the installation instructions  
included with the equipment.  
Add-On Electrical Equipment  
NOTICE:  
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle  
unless you check with your dealer first. Some  
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle  
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your  
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can  
keep other components from working as  
they should.  
To use the accessory power plug:  
1. Remove the toe-board panel by lifting up on the  
latches at the top of each corner of the panel.  
2. Locate the black connector at the left top corner of  
the compartment near the body control module  
above the two white diagnostic connectors.  
3. Disconnect the connector pigtail by pulling forward  
on the plastic locking tab and pull the connection  
apart from the wire harness.  
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to  
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing  
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.  
The plug has three separate wires:  
The orange wire connects to battery power.  
The yellow wire connects to ignition power. Power is  
only available when the ignition is in ON.  
The black wire connects to ground.  
6-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Headlamps  
NOTICE:  
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.  
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and  
off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have  
your headlamp wiring checked right away.  
When using the accessory power plug:  
DO NOT splice wires directly into the  
vehicle electrical wire harness. If done  
incorrectly, splicing may cause damage to  
your electrical system and would not be  
covered by the vehicle’s warranty.  
The maximum load of any electrical  
equipment should not exceed 15 amps.  
Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment  
when not in use. Leaving electrical  
equipment on for extended periods of time  
can drain your battery.  
DO NOT use this plug if the electrical  
equipment requires frequent connecting  
and disconnecting. This may cause  
excessive wear on the accessory power plug  
and damage your electrical system and  
the damage would not be covered by  
your warranty.  
Windshield Wipers  
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse and  
an internal circuit breaker. If the motor overheats due to  
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor  
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical  
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.  
Power Windows and Other Power Options  
Circuit breakers protect the power seats and other power  
accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the  
circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit  
until the problem is fixed or goes away.  
6-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Instrument Panel Fuse Block  
The instrument panel fuse  
Fuses and Circuit Breakers  
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  
short circuits by a combination of maxi-fuses,  
mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the  
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.  
block is located on the  
passenger’s side of the  
vehicle, under the  
instrument panel and under  
the toe-board.  
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the  
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you  
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size  
and rating.  
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a  
spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same  
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that  
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette  
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.  
Replace it as soon as you can.  
Remove the toe-board and carpet covering to access the  
fuse block. Then turn the fuse block door knob and pull  
the door to access the fuses.  
6-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Fuse  
7
Usage  
Cigarette Lighter  
Stoplamp, Hazard Flashers  
Body Control Module  
Windshield Wiper/Washer  
Accessory Power  
Blank  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Body Control Module  
Crank  
Hazard/Turn Signal  
Air Bag  
Tonneau Release  
HVAC Controls  
Instrument Panel Control  
Cruise Control  
Fuse  
Usage  
1
2
Console Cigarette Lighter  
Monitored (Inadvertent) Load  
Control  
Brake-Transmission Shift  
Interlock  
3
4
5
6
Lumbar Seat  
22  
23  
Body Control Module - Ignition 3  
Body Control Module - Ignition 2  
Driver Seat Control Module  
Radio  
Parking Lamps, Taillamps  
6-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Fuse  
24  
Usage  
Fuse  
39  
Usage  
Radio Antenna  
Micro Relay - Hatch Release  
Micro Relay - Left Daytime  
Running Lamp  
25  
Body Control Module - Ignition 1,  
Instrument Panel Control  
40  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
Hatch/Trunk Release  
HVAC Controls  
41  
42  
43  
Micro Relay - Tonneau Release  
Micro Relay - Courtesy Lamps  
Micro Relay - Automatic Lamp  
Control Parking Lamps  
Bose Speakers  
Diagnostic  
44  
Micro Relay - Automatic Lamp  
Control Headlamps  
Right Door Control Module  
Power Feed Door Right  
Fuel Tank Door  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
Bose Mini Relay - Speakers  
Mini Relay - Rear Defogger  
Maxifuse - Ignition 1  
Maxifuse - Rear Defogger  
Blank  
Door Control Module Left  
Power Feed Door Left  
Driver Power Seat (Circuit  
Breaker)  
Maxifuse - Ignition 2  
Maxifuse - Blower Motor  
Starter  
36  
37  
38  
Passenger Power Seat (Circuit  
Breaker)  
Micro Relay - Monitored  
(Inadvertent) Load Control  
Blank  
Micro Relay - Right Daytime  
Running Lamp  
Maxi Circuit Breaker - Headlamps  
6-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Engine Compartment Fuse Block  
There is one fuse block in the engine compartment  
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle in front of  
the battery.  
Fuse  
Usage  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rear Fog Lamp  
Approach  
Right Headlamp Motor  
Left Headlamp Motor  
ABS TRANS  
Fog Lamp  
6-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Fuse  
7
Usage  
Fuse  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
Usage  
Selective Real Time Damping  
Headlamp Low Beam Right  
Headlamp High Beam Right  
Headlamp Low Beam Left  
Horn  
Blank  
8
Injector 1  
9
Powertrain Control Module  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Air Conditioning  
Blank  
Headlamp High Beam Left  
Fuel Pump  
Blank  
Spare  
Cooling Fan - Ignition 3  
Oxygen Sensor  
Spare  
Spare  
Powertrain Control Module  
Throttle Control  
Spare  
Spare  
Injector 2  
Spare  
Engine Ignition  
Micro Relay - Air Pump  
Blank  
Micro Relay - Air Conditioner and  
Clutch  
6-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Fuse  
35  
Usage  
Fuse  
45  
Usage  
Micro Relay - Fuel Pump  
Micro Relay - Horn  
Mini Relay - Cooling Fan 1  
Maxi-Fuse - Cooling Fan 2  
Blank  
36  
46  
37  
Micro Relay - Rear Fog Lamp  
Micro Relay - Back-Up Lamps  
Micro Relay - Fog Lamp  
Micro Relay - AIR Solenoid  
47  
38  
48  
Blank  
39  
49  
Maxi-Fuse - Cooling Fan 1  
Maxi-Fuse - Air Pump  
40  
50  
41  
Micro Relay - Selective Real Time  
Damping  
51  
Maxi-Fuse - Selective Real Time  
Damping Electronics  
42  
43  
44  
Mini Relay - Ignition  
52  
53  
54  
Maxi-Fuse - Anti-Lock Brakes  
Anti-Lock Brakes  
Mini Relay - Cooling Fan 2  
Mini Relay - Cooling Fan 3  
Fuse Puller  
6-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Replacement Bulbs  
Capacities and Specifications  
High-Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005  
Low-Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006  
Front Parking/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 NAK  
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2057  
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Rear Stop/Tail and Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057  
The following approximate capacities are given in  
English and metric conversions.  
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”  
in the Index for more information.  
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . See the refrigerant  
information label under the hood.  
Automatic Transmission  
Drain and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)  
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8 quarts (10.2 L)  
Coolant System  
For any bulb replacements or procedures not listed here,  
please consult your dealer.  
With M30 Automatic  
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 quarts (11.9 L)  
With MM6 Manual  
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 quarts (12.2 L)  
6-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Crankcase  
Engine Specifications  
With Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 quarts (6.1 L)  
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3 gallons (73.1 L)  
Manual Transmission  
(Overhaul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 quarts (3.8 L)  
Rear Axle  
Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.69 quarts (1.6 L)  
Limited Slip Additive . . . . . . . . . 4 ounces (118 ml)  
Tire Pressures . . . . . . See Tire-Loading Information  
label on rear edge of driver’s door.  
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7L V8  
VIN Engine Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G  
Displacement . . . . . . . . . 350 cubic inches (5662 cc)  
Fuel Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequential  
Multi-Port Fuel Injection (SFI)  
Valve Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead Valve  
Piston Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7L  
Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.90 inches (9.9 cm)  
Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62 inches (9.2 cm)  
Compression Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1:1  
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 @ 5600  
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 @ 4400  
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3  
Thermostat Starts to Open . . . . . . . . 187 F (86 C)  
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)  
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be  
sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in  
this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.  
6-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Vehicle Dimensions  
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104.5 inches (265.4 cm)  
Tread  
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.1 inches (157.7 cm)  
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.0 inches (157.4 cm)  
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179.7 inches (456.4 cm)  
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73.6 inches (186.9 cm)  
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.7 inches (121.1 cm)  
Air Conditioning Refrigerants  
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air  
conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be  
sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask  
your dealer.  
Normal Maintenance  
Replacement Parts  
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A917C  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78A-72H  
Coolant Surge Tank Cap . . . GM Part No. 10296465  
15 psi (105 kPa)  
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF44  
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799C  
0.060 inch (1.524 mm)  
Spark Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-931 (0.60 inch Gap)  
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . GM Part No. 12555717  
or equivalent  
Windshield Wiper Blade  
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 inches (55.9 cm)  
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 mm x 3 mm Shepherd’s Hook  
6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Engine Power Curves  
Engine Accessory Drive Belt Routing  
6-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
NOTES  
6-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule  
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,  
dependability and emission control performance.  
Introduction  
Part B: Owner Checks and Services  
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections  
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  
Part E: Maintenance Record  
How This Section is Organized  
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance  
7-  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Introduction  
Your Vehicle and the Environment  
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your  
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the  
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures  
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even  
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid  
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level  
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our  
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good  
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.  
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan  
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your  
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer  
for details.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you  
what should be checked and when. It also explains what  
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in  
good condition.  
How This Section is Organized  
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:  
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows  
what to have done and how often. Some of these  
services can be complex, so unless you are technically  
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should  
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified  
service center do these jobs.  
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”  
explains important inspections that your dealer’s service  
department or another qualified service center  
should perform.  
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”  
lists some recommended products to help keep your  
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their  
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work  
yourself or have it done.  
CAUTION:  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can  
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can  
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance  
work only if you have the required know-how  
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.  
If you have any doubt, have a qualified  
technician do the work.  
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place  
for you to record the maintenance performed on your  
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be  
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you  
determine when your next maintenance should be done.  
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance  
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for  
warranty repairs.  
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your  
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service  
information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in  
the Index.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
This part tells you the maintenance services you should  
have done and when you should schedule them. If you  
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know  
that GM-trained and supported service people will  
perform the work using genuine GM parts.  
Part A: Scheduled  
Maintenance Services  
Using Your Maintenance Schedule  
We at General Motors want to help you keep your  
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know  
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short  
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive  
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.  
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or  
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many  
other ways.  
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in  
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses  
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary  
repairs done before you or anyone else drives  
the vehicle.  
This schedule is for vehicles that:  
carry passengers and cargo within recommended  
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s  
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your  
Vehicle” in the Index.  
Because of all the different ways people use their  
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more  
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the  
following and note how you drive. If you have any  
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good  
condition, see your dealer.  
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  
driving limits.  
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Scheduled Maintenance  
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles  
(160 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles  
(160 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown  
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at  
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).  
Footnotes  
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the  
California Air Resources Board has determined that the  
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify  
the emissions warranty or limit recall liability prior to  
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,  
urge that all recommended maintenance services be  
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance  
be recorded.  
See “Part B: Owner Checks and Services,” “Part C:  
Periodic Maintenance Inspections” and “Part D:  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” following Part A.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Scheduled Maintenance  
The Engine Oil Life Monitor won’t detect dust in the  
oil. So if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change  
your oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the  
CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. Remember to  
reset the Oil Life Monitor when the oil has been  
changed. See “Engine Oil Life Monitor” in the Index for  
more information on resetting the monitor.  
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance  
Change engine oil as indicated by the Engine Oil Life  
Monitor (or every 12 months, whichever occurs  
first). Reset the monitor. The monitor will show you  
when to change the oil -- usually between 3,000 miles  
(5 000 km) and 10,000 miles (16 000 km) since your  
last oil change. Under severe conditions, the indicator  
may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never  
drive your vehicle more than 10,000 miles (16 000 km)  
or 12 months without an oil change. Use engine oil  
meeting the GM Standard GM4718M.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Scheduled Maintenance  
ENGINE OIL CHANGED  
ENGINE OIL CHANGED  
ACTUAL  
ACTUAL  
DATE  
SERVICED BY:  
DATE  
SERVICED BY:  
MILEAGE  
MILEAGE  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Scheduled Maintenance  
ENGINE OIL CHANGED  
ENGINE OIL CHANGED  
ACTUAL  
ACTUAL  
DATE  
SERVICED BY:  
DATE  
SERVICED BY:  
MILEAGE  
MILEAGE  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Scheduled Maintenance  
15,000 Miles (24 000 km)  
DATE  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter  
if necessary.  
SERVICED BY:  
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)  
30,000 Miles (48 000 km)  
DATE  
Replace air cleaner filter.  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
SERVICED BY:  
An Emission Control Service.  
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket  
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.  
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)  
45,000 Miles (72 000 km)  
DATE  
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter  
if necessary.  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
SERVICED BY:  
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Scheduled Maintenance  
50,000 Miles (80 000 km)  
DATE  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven  
under one or more of these conditions:  
SERVICED BY:  
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F  
(32 C) or higher.  
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
– Uses such as high performance operation.  
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid  
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km). Manual transmission fluid doesnt  
require change.  
60,000 Miles (96 000 km)  
DATE  
Replace air cleaner filter.  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
SERVICED BY:  
An Emission Control Service.  
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket  
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.  
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)  
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.  
An Emission Control Service.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Scheduled Maintenance  
75,000 Miles (120 000 km)  
DATE  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter  
if necessary.  
SERVICED BY:  
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)  
90,000 Miles (144 000 km)  
DATE  
Replace air cleaner filter.  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
SERVICED BY:  
An Emission Control Service.  
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket  
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.  
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)  
100,000 Miles (160 000 km)  
DATE  
Replace spark plugs.  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
SERVICED BY:  
An Emission Control Service.  
Inspect spark plug wires.  
An Emission Control Service.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven  
under one or more of these conditions:  
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F  
(32 C) or higher.  
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
– Uses such as high performance operation.  
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.  
If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and,  
therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the  
fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.  
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)  
DATE  
ACTUAL  
MILEAGE  
Drain, flush and refill the cooling system (or every 60 months since last  
service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what  
to use.  
SERVICED BY:  
An Emission Control Service.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check  
Part B: Owner Checks and Services  
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the  
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which  
should be performed at the intervals specified to help  
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control  
performance of your vehicle.  
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if  
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index  
for further details.  
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.  
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your  
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in  
Part D.  
At Least Once a Month  
Tire Inflation Check  
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.  
See “Tires” in the Index for further details.  
At Each Fuel Fill  
Cassette Deck Service  
It is important for you or a service station attendant to  
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.  
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every  
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index  
for further details.  
Engine Oil Level Check  
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if  
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for  
further details.  
Power Antenna Service  
Clean power antenna mast. See “Audio Systems” in the  
Index for further details.  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL  
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in  
the Index for further details.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Manual Transmission Check  
At Least Twice a Year  
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See  
“Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index. Check for  
leaks. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the  
system inspected and repaired if needed.  
Restraint System Check  
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your  
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are  
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged  
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might  
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it  
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.  
Automatic Transmission Inspection  
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.  
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid  
loss. Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to  
your Chevrolet dealership Service Department and have  
it repaired as soon as possible.  
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,  
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system  
does not need regular maintenance.)  
At Least Once a Year  
Wiper Blade Check  
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade  
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or  
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,  
Cleaning” in the Index.  
Key Lock Cylinders Service  
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant  
specified in Part D.  
Body Lubrication Service  
Weatherstrip Lubrication  
Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges  
and latches, including those for the hood, rear  
compartment, console door and any folding seat  
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent  
lubrication may be required when exposed to a  
corrosive environment.  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply  
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,  
damp weather more frequent application may be  
required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in  
the Index.)  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Starter Switch Check  
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check  
(Automatic Transmission)  
CAUTION:  
CAUTION:  
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could  
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be  
injured. Follow the steps below.  
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could  
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be  
injured. Follow the steps below.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room  
around the vehicle.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough  
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a  
level surface.  
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking  
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.  
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be  
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.  
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”  
in the Index if necessary).  
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the  
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in  
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in  
any other position, your vehicle needs service.  
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake  
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.  
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,  
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the  
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of  
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever  
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI  
needs service.  
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever  
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway  
and try to start the engine. The starter should work  
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to  
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t  
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Ignition Automatic Transmission Lock Check  
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing  
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the  
parking brake.  
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn  
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position. The  
key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever is in  
PARK (P).  
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With  
the engine running and transmission in  
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from  
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is  
held by the parking brake only.  
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in OFF.  
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission  
PARK (P) Mechanism Check  
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:  
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then  
release all brakes.  
CAUTION:  
Underbody Flushing Service  
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any  
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to  
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris  
can collect.  
When you are doing this check, your vehicle  
could begin to move. You or others could be  
injured and property could be damaged. Make  
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case  
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular  
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Tire and Wheel Inspection  
Inspect the tires for uneven wear or damage. If there is  
irregular or premature wear, check the wheel alignment.  
Inspect for damaged wheels.  
Part C: Periodic Maintenance  
Inspections  
Listed in this part are inspections and services which  
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,  
each spring and fall). You should let your dealers  
service department or other qualified service center do  
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are  
completed at once.  
Exhaust System Inspection  
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body  
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,  
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,  
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could  
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let  
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in  
the Index.  
Proper procedures to perform these services may be  
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner  
Publications” in the Index.  
Steering and Suspension Inspection  
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering  
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of  
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering  
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,  
cracks, chafing, etc.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Engine Cooling System Inspection  
Brake System Inspection  
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are  
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,  
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside  
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help  
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling  
system and pressure cap is recommended at least once  
a year.  
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and  
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,  
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors  
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,  
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to  
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving  
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.  
Rear Axle Service  
Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and add if  
needed. See “Rear Axle” in the Index. A fluid loss may  
indicate a problem. Check the axle and repair it  
if needed.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Part D: Recommended Fluids  
and Lubricants  
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,  
part number or specification may be obtained from  
your dealer.  
USAGE  
FLUID/LUBRICANT  
Engine Coolant  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only GM  
Goodwrench DEX-COOL or  
Havoline DEX-COOL  
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in  
the Index.  
USAGE  
FLUID/LUBRICANT  
Engine Oil  
The engine requires a special  
Engine Oil meeting GM Standard  
GM4718M. Oils meeting this  
Standard may be identified as  
synthetic, and should also be  
identified with the American  
Petroleum Institute Certified For  
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”  
symbol. However, not all  
Synthetic API oils with the  
Starburst symbol will meet this  
GM Standard. You should look for  
and use only an oil that meets GM  
Standard GM4718M. For the  
proper viscosity, see “Engine Oil”  
in the Index.  
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid  
System  
(GM Part No. 12377967 or  
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).  
Windshield  
Washer Solvent  
GM Optikleen Washer Solvent  
(GM Part No. 1051515)  
or equivalent.  
Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part  
System  
No. 12345347 or equivalent  
DOT-3 Brake Fluid).  
Power Steering  
System  
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM  
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,  
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).  
Manual  
Transmission  
DEXRON -III Automatic  
Transmission Fluid.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
USAGE  
FLUID/LUBRICANT  
USAGE  
FLUID/LUBRICANT  
Automatic  
Transmission  
DEXRON -III Automatic  
Transmission Fluid.  
Hood Latch  
Assembly,  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(GM Part No. 12346293 or  
Secondary Latch, equivalent) or lubricant meeting  
Key Lock  
Cylinders  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,  
Superlube (GM Part  
No. 12346241 or equivalent).  
Pivots, Spring  
Anchor and  
Release Pawl  
requirements of NLGI # 2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Rear Axle  
(Limited-Slip  
Differential)  
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle  
Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261  
or equivalent) meeting GM  
Specification 9986115. With a  
complete drain and refill add  
4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip  
Axle Lubricant Additive (GM Part  
No. 1052358 or equivalent) where  
required. See “Rear Axle” in  
the Index.  
Hood and Door  
Hinges  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,  
Superlube (GM Part  
No. 12346241 or equivalent).  
Weatherstrip  
Conditioning  
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM  
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Part E: Maintenance Record  
After the scheduled services are performed, record the  
date, odometer reading and who performed the service  
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.  
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and  
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on  
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all  
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio  
is a convenient place to store them.  
Maintenance Record  
ODOMETER  
READING  
DATE  
SERVICED BY  
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Maintenance Record  
ODOMETER  
READING  
DATE  
SERVICED BY  
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information  
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain  
service publications and how to report any safety defects.  
8-4  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone  
(TTY) Users  
8-10  
Warranty Information  
Reporting Safety Defects to the United  
States Government  
8-4  
Customer Assistance Offices  
GM Mobility Program for Persons  
with Disabilities  
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program  
Canadian Roadside Assistance  
Courtesy Transportation  
8-10  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
Canadian Government  
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors  
Ordering Service and Owner Publications  
in Canada  
8-11  
8-  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your  
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will  
be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service  
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best  
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can  
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your  
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:  
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of  
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be  
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already  
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,  
contact the owner of the dealership or the  
general manager.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your  
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That  
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have  
a concern.  
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of  
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be  
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact  
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by  
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada  
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling  
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).  
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer  
are committed to making sure you are completely  
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you  
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the  
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you must file  
with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any  
additional rights you may have. Canadian owners  
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance  
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order  
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the  
following information available to give the Customer  
Assistance Representative:  
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available  
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate  
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible  
through the windshield.)  
Information booklet for information on the Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
Dealership name and location  
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program  
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to  
settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the  
interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute  
resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of  
the program is free of charge and your case will generally  
be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the  
decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed  
with any other venue for relief available to you.  
Customer Assistance for Text  
Telephone (TTY) Users  
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or  
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),  
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer  
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with  
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in  
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)  
Customer Assistance Offices  
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone  
number or write them at the following address:  
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free  
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write  
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s  
Customer Assistance Center.  
BBB Auto Line  
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.  
4200 Wilson Boulevard  
Suite 800  
Arlington, VA 22203-1804  
United States  
Chevrolet Motor Division  
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center  
P.O. Box 7047  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
This program is available in all 50 states and the District  
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,  
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the  
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue  
its participation in this program.  
Troy, MI 48007-7047  
1-800-222-1020  
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean,  
Canada  
call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
GM Mobility Program for Persons  
with Disabilities  
This program, available to  
qualified applicants, can  
reimburse you up to $1,000  
toward aftermarket driver or  
passenger adaptive  
equipment you may require  
for your vehicle (hand  
controls, wheelchair/scooter  
lifts, etc.).  
1-800-263-3777 (English)  
1-800-263-7854 (French)  
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800  
All Overseas Locations  
GMODC - Customer Communication Centre  
169-007  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
This program can also provide you with free resource  
information, such as area driver assessment centers and  
mobility equipment installers. The program is available  
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle  
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call  
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.  
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.  
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call  
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users  
call 1-800-263-3830. When calling from the United  
States, please dial 1-905-644-3063.  
Telephone: 905-644-4112  
Fax:  
905-644-4866  
Caribbean Numbers  
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico  
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico  
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic  
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic  
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands  
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas  
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
problems. If your problem cannot be resolved over the  
phone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network of  
dealer recommended service providers. Roadside  
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program  
membership is free; however some services may incur costs.  
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,  
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:  
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA  
Free towing for warranty repairs  
Basic over-the-phone technical advice  
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,  
wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass  
repair, etc.)  
ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:  
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)  
Plus:  
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer  
from a legal roadway)  
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer  
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the  
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance  
Center. As the owner of a 1999 Chevrolet, membership  
in Roadside Assistance is free.  
FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost  
on the road or locked inside)  
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)  
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,  
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA  
(1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you  
over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical  
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on  
the road)  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the  
following available to give to the advisor:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
License plate number  
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers  
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will  
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by  
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
to eligible purchasers of 1999 Chevrolet passenger cars  
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer  
for details.)  
Vehicle color  
Vehicle location  
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease  
customers operating 1999 and newer Chevrolet vehicles  
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),  
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must  
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer  
service management.  
Telephone number where you can be reached  
Vehicle mileage  
Description of problem  
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure  
inside your owner information portfolio for full  
program details.  
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or  
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to  
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care  
at any time.  
Canadian Roadside Assistance  
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive  
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere  
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the  
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call  
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.  
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer  
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.  
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that  
will provide you with quality and priority service. When  
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain  
any payment obligations that may be incurred for  
utilizing outside services.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle  
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the  
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.  
Courtesy Transportation  
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in  
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your  
ownership experience, we and our participating  
dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a  
customer support program for new vehicles.  
Transportation Options  
Warranty service can generally be completed while you  
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps  
minimize your inconvenience by providing several  
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,  
your dealer can offer you one of the following:  
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail  
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the  
Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation  
options are available when warranty repairs are  
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during  
warranty repairs.  
Shuttle Service  
Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service  
to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of  
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a  
destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.  
Plan Ahead When Possible  
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you  
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.  
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your  
service consultant of your transportation needs, your  
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If it is  
determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into  
the service department immediately and is still  
operative, you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until  
scheduling can be accomplished.  
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement  
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,  
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)  
may be available for the use of public transportation  
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange  
transportation through a friend or relative,  
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to  
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.  
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be  
supported by original receipts.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Courtesy Rental Vehicle  
Courtesy Transportation is available only at  
participating dealerships and all program options, such  
as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.  
Please contact your dealer for specific information about  
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements  
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.  
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight  
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide  
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a  
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a  
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This  
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement  
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider  
requirements. Requirements vary and may include  
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit  
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and  
may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,  
excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the  
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the  
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General  
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,  
alternative transportation may be available under the  
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your  
dealer for details.  
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,  
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time  
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the  
terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.  
completion of the repair.  
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a  
courtesy rental.  
General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the  
right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a  
valid motor vehicle operators license in their name,  
anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or  
anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so  
as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely.  
Additional Program Information  
Courtesy Transportation is available during the  
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,  
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner  
Assistance Information” furnished with each new  
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.  
Warranty Information  
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet  
that contains detailed warranty information.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  
TO THE UNITED STATES  
GOVERNMENT  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could  
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should  
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic  
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to  
notifying General Motors.  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO  
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT  
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle  
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify  
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General  
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:  
Transport Canada  
330 Sparks Street  
Tower C  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an  
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved  
in individual problems between you, your dealer or  
General Motors.  
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety  
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the  
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:  
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from the hotline.  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  
TO GENERAL MOTORS  
Ordering Service and Owner  
Publications in Canada  
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)  
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify  
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:  
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service  
literature are available for purchase for all current and  
past model General Motors vehicles.  
Chevrolet Motor Division  
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center  
P.O. Box 7047  
Troy, MI 48007-7047  
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information  
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.  
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)  
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
1999 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION  
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out  
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,  
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)  
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 CHEVROLET  
SERVICE MANUALS  
OWNER’S INFORMATION  
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information  
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,  
electrical, steering, body, etc.  
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and  
intended to provide basic operational information about the  
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance  
Schedule for all models.  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00  
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and  
Warranty Booklet.  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00  
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE  
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL  
This manual provides information on unit repair service  
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the  
1999 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00  
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00  
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS  
SERVICE BULLETINS  
Service Publications are available for current and past  
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please  
specify year and model name of the vehicle.  
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed  
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.  
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the  
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.  
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON  
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:  
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123  
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time  
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207  
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal  
ORDER TOLL FREE  
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)  
1-800-551-4123  
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)  
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927  
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call  
1-800-551-4123.Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return  
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied  
against the original order.  
VEHICLE MODEL  
NAME  
PUBLICATION FORM  
PRICE  
EACH*  
TOTAL  
PRICE  
ITEM DESCRIPTION  
QTY.  
NUMBER  
YEAR  
1
9
9
9
1999  
$90.00  
$50.00  
$15.00  
$10.00  
Service Manual  
Car & Light Truck  
Transmission Unit Repair  
1999  
1999  
1999  
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio  
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio  
G
M
TOTAL MATERIAL  
Check or Money  
Order payable to  
Helm, Inc. (USA funds  
only — do not send cash.)  
MasterCard  
VISA  
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the  
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.  
Mail completed order form to:  
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207  
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.  
Michigan Purchasers  
add 6% sales tax  
P
S
H
I
U.S. Order Processing  
$5.00  
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Canadian Postage  
(See Note Below)  
GRAND TOTAL  
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)  
(ATTENTION)  
Discover  
P
Account  
Number:  
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)  
T
O
Check here if your billing address  
is different from your shipping  
address shown.  
Expiration  
Date mo/yr:  
(CITY)  
(STATE)  
(ZIP CODE)  
(
)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.  
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE  
AREA CODE  
GM-CHE-ORD99  
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring  
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)  
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents  
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the  
U.S. order processing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
NOTES  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Section 9 Index  
Active Handling  
Anti-Lock  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Appearance Care Materials Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64  
Automatic  
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3  
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20  
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23  
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24  
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23  
Antenna  
Electronic Dual Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Automatic Transmission  
9-  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
yellowblue  
Back-Up Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38  
Replacement, Remote Function Actuation (RFA)  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-13  
Brake  
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31  
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29  
Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) . . . . . . . . . 2-28, 2-37  
Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
BTSI Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30  
Cassette  
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39  
Securing in the Passenger Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33  
Cleaning  
Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60  
Canada, Ordering Service and Owner Publications . . . 8-11  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Climate Control, Automatic Electronic Dual . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Compact Disc  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Defogger, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92  
Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls and Displays 2-93  
Driver Information Center (DIC) Messages  
Active Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Driver Information Center (DIC) Messages (Continued)  
Change Oil Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112  
Cruise Disengaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112  
Engine Protection Reduce Engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . 2-112  
High Oil Temperature Reduce Engine rpm . . . . . . . . 2-107  
High Tire Pressure - (LF, LR, RF, RR) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111  
High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112  
Low Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104  
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112  
Maximum Speed 80 mph (129 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107  
Traction System - On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Electrical Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 3-28, 6-63  
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66  
Electronic Dual Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . 5-8  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Exit and Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53  
Fabric Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57  
Fifth Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31  
Filling  
Finish  
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61  
Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62  
First Gear  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Fourth Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31  
Front  
Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21  
Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35  
Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Heated Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55  
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Hood  
Gages  
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64  
Gross  
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Inadvertent  
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54  
Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window Antennas . . . . 3-32  
Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36  
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-36  
Lights  
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80, 4-7  
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86  
Ignition Automatic Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60  
Front Sidemarkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Your Vehicle and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Manual  
Neutral  
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76  
Overdrive, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29  
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Manual Transmission  
Power/Heated Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55  
PARK (P)  
Parking  
Your Vehicle, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Portable Fuel Container, Filling a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Power  
Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Rearview Mirror, Inside Day/Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Remote Function Actuation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Resynchronizing Your Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Remote Hatch/Trunk Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Replacement  
Restraints  
Remote/Heated Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55  
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19  
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40  
Resynchronizing Your Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Reverse  
Racing or Other Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25  
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Rear  
Turn Signal and Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . 6-36  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33  
Second Gear  
Security  
Service  
Bulletins, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
Service and Owner Publications, Ordering in Canada . . . 8-11  
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25  
Sixth Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31  
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11  
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Seatback  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Starter  
Wheel, Telescopic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42  
Storage  
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56  
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18  
Surge Tank  
System Controls, Comfort Control System . . . . . . . . 3-2, 3-4  
Theft-Deterrent System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27  
Third Gear  
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31  
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48  
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yellowblue  
Towing  
Traction Control  
Transmitters, Remote Function Actuation System . . . . . . 2-7  
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43  
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43  
Warning Lights, Gages and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77  
Wheel  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41  
Universal Theft-Deterrent System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
Vehicle  
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Box Network Hardware ACS2009A R2 xx User Manual
BMW Automobile 325CI User Manual
Bogen Network Router RPKUTI1 User Manual
Bose Cell Phone Accessories AM316766 User Manual
Bose Portable Speaker 354495 1100 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Plumbing Product AC0201 User Manual
Bryant Heating System 39004DP230 User Manual
Canon Camera Accessories 3552B002 User Manual
Canon Home Theater Server XA20 User Manual
Chamberlain Garage Door Opener PD752DS User Manual